THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. DB FALCK LEBAIIN'S POPULAR SERIES OF GERMAN SCHOOL-BOOKS. "As an educational writer in the German tanyuf, Dr Lrhnhn stands alone ; none other has made even a distant approach to him." BRITISH STANDAUD. Lebahn's First German Course. Third Edition. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d. cloth. "It is hardly possible to have a simpler or better book for beginners in German. ATHEN^UJI. Lebahn's German Language in One Volume. Seventh Edition, containing I. A Practical Grammar, with Exercises to every Rule. II. Undine; a Tale; by DE LA MOTTE FOUQUE, with Explanatory Notes of all difficult words and phrases. III. A Vocabulary of 4500 Words, synonymous in English and German. Crown 8vo, 8s. cloth. With Key, 10s. 6d. Key separate, 2s. Gd. " The best German Grammar that has yet been published." MORNING POST. Lebahn's Edition of Schmid's Henry Von Eichenfels. With Vocabulary and Familiar Dialogues. Seventh Edition. Crown 8vo, 3s. Gd. cloth. "Excellently adapted to assist self-exercise in the German language." SPECTATOR. Lebahn's First German Reader. Fifth Edition. Crown 8vo, 3s. Gd. cloth. "Like all Lebahn's works, most thoroughly practical." BRITANNIA. Lebahn's German Classics ; with Notes and Complete Vocabularies. Crown 8vo, price 3s. 6d. each, cloth. EGMONT. A Tragedy, in Five Acts, by GOETHE. WILHELM TELL. A Drama, in Five Acts, by SCHILLER. GOETZ VON BERLICHINGEN. A Drama, by GOETHE. PAGENSTREICIIE, a Page's Frolics. A Comedy, by KOTZEBUE. EMILIA GALOTTI. A Tragedy, in Five Acts, by LESSING. UNDINE. A Tale, by FOUQUE. SELECTIONS from the GERMAN POETS. " Prepared for the use of learners who read without a master. . . . With such aids, a student will find no difficulty in these masterpieces." ATHBN^OM. Lebahn's German Copy-Book : being a Series of Exercises in German Penmanship, beautifully engraved on Steel. 2s. Gd. sd. Lebahn's Exercises in German. 2d Edit. Cr. 8vo, 3s. cd. ci. " A volume of ' Exercises in German,' including in itself all the vocabularies they require. The book is well planned; the selections for translation from German into English, or from English into German, being sometimes curiously well suited to the purpose for which they are taken." EXAMINER. %* A KEY to the ABOVE is published, price 2s. 6d. Lebahn's Self-Instructor in German. Cr. 8vo, GS. 6d. cloth. " One of the most amusing elementary reading-books that ever passed under our hands." JOHN BULL. London : LOCKWOOD AND Co., WOOD'S OLD BOOK SrCRE 1*46 Broadway POPULAR EDUCATIONAL WORKS. The Civil Service Geography : Being a Manual of Geo- graphy, General and Politl dates and the higher fon > (< ivil - . With six Coloured .Maps. New Edition, revised and enlarge*: price 2s. 6d. - [j us t published. "A novel plan, . . . as effectual as it is original. The most recent and ithoritiea have h<-en consulted, ;>nd it ; - ,-. ell us a most ingenious, compendium of geography." CIVIL 8 The Civil Service Book-Keeping. BOOK-KEEPING NO MYSTERY : Its Principles Popularly Explained, and the Theory of Double Entry -udates, &c. By an BOOK-KKEPKB, late of II. M. Civil Service. Tcap, cloth, price 2s. [Just j> " We liave never seen a work which expressed with greater force and plain- ness the mode of keeping accounts." CIVIL .- ' A readable and well-written introduction." , Events to be Remembered in the History of England. Forming a Series of Interesting Narratives, extracted from the i Contemporary or Modem Historians, of the mo Occurrences in each Iteign ; with Reviews of the .Manners, Domestic 1 1 Amusements, Costumes, A. Table, &c. By CHAP.I.KS SKI.KY. 26th Edition, fcap, price 2s. 6d. cloth. >'.B. Ax iLi.rsTUATMi ift Book, with nine beautiful Illustrations by AXELAY, fcap, 3s. Gd. cloth, elegant, gilt edges. Poetry for Schools and Families ; or, The Beauties of English Poor* ' for the Use of Youth. By E.TOMKIXS. Twenty- second Edition, carefully revised and greatly enlarged, with fine steel eii- graving. 1'cap, 2s. (Id. cloth ; 3s. gilt edges. The Historical Finger-Post : A Handy Book of Terms, Phra- Allusions, etc., in connexion with Universal History. By ED\VA Why - i 'rown 8vo, pp. ,",st. 2s, M. cloth. "A handy little volume, which will supply the place of Hadyn's Dictionary of Dates' to many persons who cannot afford that work." BOOKSELLER. School-Days of Eminent Men. Containing School and .-. Lives of the most celebrated British Authors, Poets, and Philos- ophers; Inventors and Discoverers; Divine sen, and By JOHV Til I'd Edition. "With Frontispiece by r. 13 Views of Public Schools, and 20 Portraits by Harvey. ]'; " A book to interest all boys, but more especially those of Westminster, Eton, llarr. ;:ools of high repute, the accounts are full and interesting." NOTES AND QUERIES. Mind Your H's and Take Care of Your It's. Exercises for acquiring the Use and correcting the Abuse of the letter 11; with and Additional Exercises on the letter K. J!y (.'n i ii, Author of "Clerical Elocution," &c. Fcap, Is. cloth. When to Double Your Consonants. Pec. "THK WRITER'S ENCIIIIMD!' ' fall the Verbs that D'liblet!, on tiiki :-bout sixty of which are exceptions to the rule. liy J. I. IGmo, la. cloth. London : LOCKWOOD AKD Co., 7 Stationers' Hall Court. st of 'i, participle past of devoir, to owe, to distin- guish it from the compound article du, of the, some ; but the accent is only used in the singular masculine of the participle, as there can be no mistake in the feminine singular, nor in the plural of either gender; Over tu, participle past of taire, to be silent, to dis- tinguish it from the pronoun tu, thou ; Over crii, past participle of croitre, to grow, to distin- guish it from cru, past participle of croire, to believe. OF TIIE APOSTROPHE. 10. The Apostrophe is a small mark in the form of a comma ( ' ), which is placed over the line between two letters, to point out the elision or suppression of a vqwel at the end of a word before another word beginning with a vowel, or h mute, as in lame, the soul ; I'homme, the man ; s'il, if he ; instead of la dine, le homme, si il. A, E, I, are the only vowels liable to be thus cut off. 11. The A is suppressed only in la, article or pronoun. 12. The elision of the E occurs, not only in the mascu- line article and pronoun le, but also in the monosyllables je, me, te, se, ce, de, ne, que ; and, moreover (1.) Injusque, before a, au, aux, id; a.s,jusqu'a Rome. (2.) In lorsque, puisque, and quoique, before z7, Us, elle, elles, on, un, une, or a word with which these conjunctions are immediately connected; as Lorsqu'ils viendronl. Puisquainsi est. Puuqu'U le vent. Quot'qu'elle soit. (3.) In quelque, before un, une ; as, quelqu'un, qucl- qitune ; and also in quel qu'il so//, quelle qu'elle soit. But we write quelque autre ; quelque historien. (4.) In presque, in the compound word presqu'Cle, pen- insula; and likewise in grande, in the words grand'merc and grand 1 tante. We also say and write: La grand'messe. Avoir grand '/aim. Faire grand 'chere. C'est grand 'pitie. II eut grand'peur. Ce n'est pas grand' chose. 13. The I is cut off only in the conjunction si (if) before the pronoun il and its plural Us, but never before die or elles, nor any other word whatever. 10 OP THE HYPHEN, DLERESlS, AND CEDILLA. 14. But no elision of the a or e takes place in le, la, de t cc, que, before out, huit, huitaine, huiiteme, onze, and on- zieme ; neither in the pronouns le or la, after a verb in the imperative mood, nor in the adverb la : so we say, le out et le non ; le huit ou le onze du mois ; menez-le a Paris ; ira-t-il la avec vous ? 15. The final e of the preposition entre is retained be- fore the pronouns euz t elles, and before autres ; and is only retrenched when entre forms a compound word with another word beginning with a vowel; as entr'acte, entr'ouvrir, s'entr' accuser, s'entr' aider. OF THE HYPHEN. 16. The Hyphen (in French, tiret or trait d 1 union) is a short horizontal line, thus - , which is used principally in connecting compound words, and between a verb and a pronoun, when a question is asked, as in arc-en-ciel, rainbow ; chef-d'oeuvre, master-piece ; parlez~voiis ? do you speak ? avez-vous * have you ? OF THE DIAERESIS. 17. The Dicer esis (in French, tre'ma or die'rese] is a mark of two points, thus , put over the vowels e, i, , to intimate that they form a distinct syllable from the vowels that precede them, as in the words cigue, hem- lock ; Mo'ise, Moses ; Saul, Saul ; which are pronounced Ci-gu-e, Mo-ise, Sa-ul. OF THE CEDILLA. 18. The Cedilla is a small mark placed under the letter (7, to indicate that it is to be pronounced like $, before the vowels A, o, u, as in Franqais, French ; garqon, boy 5 macron, mason ; requ, received. The signs of punctuation, and all other marks and cha- racters, are the same in French as in English. OF NUMBER, CASKS, AND GKNI It OF NUMBER. 19. There arc two numbers in French ; the singular and the plural. The singular denotes one person or tiling ; the plural denotes more than one. OF CASES. 20. The French language has no Cases, properly so called, and consequently no declensions. The French express by prepositions, and especially by de (of or from), and a (to or at), the relations which the Greeks and the Romans indicated by the change of the different ter- minations of their nouns. OF GENDER. 21. The French language has only two genders, the masculine and the feminine. The gender of animate or living beings presents no difficulty, as all males are mas- culine, and all females are feminine ; but it is only by practice that one can learn the gender of inanimate ob- jects, and of animals whose names are the same for the male and female, such as elephant, elephant ; bujfte, buf- falo ; cygne, swan ; perdrix, partridge ; baleine, whale ; truite, trout; saumon, salmon. It is not possible to give general and precise rules by means of which one may, on every occasion, distinguish the gender of a noun from its mere aspect. Several Grammarians, however, have given treatises on the genders ; but those treatises are extremely incomplete ; gome of their rules are vague, and above all liable to numberless exceptions. The truth i.s, the perfect know- ledge of the gender of substantives can only be the work of time. It is by reading with attention, and by having recourse, in cases of doubt, to a dictionary, that one will insensibly acquire a complete knowledge of the genders. Nevertheless in cases of doubt, and in the absence of a 12 OP GENDER. dictionary, it may be of some practical utility to know that about nine tenths of the nouns ending in e not ac- cented are feminine ; the final e mute being, in French, the distinctive mark of the feminine gender. The French call the termination in e mute, a feminine termination ; any other is called masculine. This dis- tinction arises probably from the circumstance that most nouns of the feminine gender end with an e mute ; thus, la table, la rue, la plante, la tete, la fenetre, la chambre, la plume, I'encre. 22. Names of states, empires, kingdoms, and provinces arc of the gender which their terminations indicate ; thus : Danemarck, Piemont, Tyrol, Portugal, etc., are masculine ; but : Angleterre, Irlande, Ecosse, France, Espagne, Italie, Suisse, Belgique, Hollande, Allemagne, Prusse, etc. which end in e mute, are feminine. Le Hanovre, le Bengale, le Mexique, and perhaps a few more, are exceptions. 23. The preceding rule is applicable to towns ; every name of a town ending with an e mute is generally femi- nine, any other termination is masculine ; thus : Rome, Mantoue, Toulouse, Marseille, are feminine ; but : Paris, Lyon, Rouen, Toulon, Amsterdam, are masculine. Jeru- salem is feminine ; Londrcs is masculine. So we say, Londrcs estjlorissant; Marseille est jlorissante. But, when one is uncertain of the gender of a town, the best way to get out of the difficulty is to put the word ville before the name of the town, and say : la ville de Druxellcs, la ville de Lisbonne, etc. 24. To the student who understands Latin, it may not be unimportant to know, that of nouns derived from that language, those from feminine nouns arc mostly feminine, and those from masculine or neuter nouns, masculine ; as foi from fides, loi from lex, fourmi from formica, genie from genius, college from collegium, poeme from poe'ma, incendie from inccndium,^eu!;e from fluvius, &c. The gender of Nouns has been generally marked, in the Exercises throughout this work, in order to facilitate the acquirement of this part of French Grammar. 13 PART I. 2.5. There are, in French, as in English, nine sorts of words, usually called PARTS OF SPEECH ; namely, 1. ARTICLE. 2. SUBSTANTIVE or XOUN. 3. ADJECTIVE. 4. PRONOUN. 5. VERB. G. ADVERB. 7. PREPOSITION. 8. CONJUNCTION. 9. INTERJECTION. CHAPTER I. OF THE ARTICLE. 20. The Article is a word placed hcforc a noun, to point it out, and to show the extent of its meaning. The French article is le, la, les, the. As the French language has borrowed much from the Latin, there is every reason to think that we have formed our le and our la from the pronoun ille, ilia, illud. From the last syllable of the masculine word ille, we have made le ; and from the last syllable of the feminine ilia, we have made la; it is thus also that from the first syllabic of that word, we have made our pronoun il (he), which we use with verbs, as likewise from the feminine ilia we have made elle (she). We use le before substantives masculine in the singu- lar ; la before substantives feminine, also in the singular ; and, as the letter s, in the French language, is the sign of the plural when it is added to the singular, we have formed les from the singular le. Les serves equally for both genders. When le or la comes before a noun beginning with a vowel or h mute, the e or a is cut off, and an apostrophe is put instead of the letter omitted. (Sec page 9.) 14 OF TIIE ARTICLE. 27. From the foregoing remarks it follows that the learner is to translate the English article Ch before a noun masculine singular. \ la before a noun feminine singular. The, by < Z' before a noun, either masculine or feminine I singular, beginning with a vowel or h mute. \les before any noun in the plural. A or an is trans- f un before a noun masculine. lated by : ( une before a noun feminine. 28. The English prepositions to and at are generally rendered in French by a ; and of mid from hy cZe, or d 1 if the word begins with a vowel or an h mute. EXERCISE I. Tlie father. The mother. The children. The brother __ pere m. mere f. enfants pi. frere m. The sister. The uncle. The aunt. The relations. A son. sceur f. oncle m. tante f. parents pi. fils m. A daughter. The man. The women. A boy. fille f. homme h.m. femmes pi. gar^on m The day. The night The sun. The moon. The jour in. nitit f. soleil m. lune f stars. A history. The school. A book. The page. ttoilcs pi. histoire f. ecole f. tare m. 29. CONTRACTION OF THE ARTICLE. Whenever the prepositions a (to or at) or de (of or from] precede the article le before a noun masculine singular, beginning with a consonant or h aspirate, a le is contracted into aw, and de le into du ; and before plural nouns of either gender, a les is changed into aux, and de les into des. A and de are not contracted with le before nouns which begin with a vowel or h mnte, but then the article suffers elision. Nor are a and de ever contracted with la. The learner will therefore translate f (before a noun masculine singular, beginning I with a consonant, or h aspirate. a la 1 l jc f re a noun feminine singular, beginning ( with a consonant, or h aspirate. - 7, j before a noun masculine or feminine, in the 1 singular, beginning with a vowel, or h mute. (_ aux before any noun in the plural. OF THK ARTICLE. 15 f , ("before a noun masculine singulai, beginning ( with a consonant, or h aspirate. e, > jj e f ore ft noun feminine singular, beginning f ^/ { 1 with a consonant, or h aspirate. from i le, \ , before a noun masculine or feminine, in tlio ~t singular, beginning witli a vowel, or h mute. [ dcs before any noun in the plural. To a, to an, ( ^ un before a noun masculine. ' a > r, a ft 1 a une before a noun feminine, are translated by (_ Of or from a f d' un before a noun masculine, or an, by (_ d' wwe before a noun feminine. EXERCISE II. To the king. To the queen. To the hero. To the scholars. roi m. reine f. heros h asp. ecoliers pi. Of the master. Of the house. Of the church. Of the coat. maitrem. maison f. eglisef. habit hm. Of the curtains. To a dictionary. Of a grammar. To a pen. rideauxp}. dictionnairem. grammairef. plume f. Of a penknife. At the hotel. From the garden. To the canifm. hotettim. jardinm. town. Of the harp. To a watch. From a clock. ville f. keurpet.htff, montref. horlogef. Of the ladies. At an inn. From a village to a town. dames pi. auberge f. m. GENERAL RULES ON THE ARTICLE. 30. I. The article must always agree in gender and number with its noun. 31. II. The article and the prepositions a and de, who- ther contracted or not, are generally repeated in French before every noun, although often omitted in English. KX AMPLE. Le lis cst le iynibolc de la candcnr, I Tho lily is the emblem of candour, de /'innomicci et de la purctd innocence, andpunty EXERCISE III. The lion is the king of animals. The fox is the m. eat roi m. art. animauxfl. renardm. emblem of cunning'. The rose is the queen of flowers.^ i mem art. nisct. f. reine f, art. Jlcnrn \>\. 1C OF THE ARTICLE. Idleness is the mother of all vices. The love of art. parcsse f. mere f. de tons art. pi. amour m. life is natural to man. She (is learning) art. trief. naturel art. hommehm. Elle apprend drawing 1 , music, and dancing. I write to the art. dessin m. art. musique f. et art. danse f. J'ecris nephew and the niece. The Creator of heaven and neveu m. pr. niece f. Createur m. art. del m. earth The vigour of mind and body, pr. art. terre f. vigueiirf. art. esprilm. pr. art. corps m. 32. III. OF THE ARTICLE du, de la, dt I', des, USED ix A TARTITIVE SENSE, t. e. implying a part, not the whole. Du for the masculine, de la for the feminine, de V be- fore a vowel or h mute, des for the plural, answering to the English words SOME or ANY, expressed or understood, must be repeated before every noun in French. EXAMPLES. Envoycz-nous du pain, de la viande, ct det pommcs de terre. Avez-vous de la monnaie? Send vs some bread, meat, and potatoes. //ace you got any diange 1 EXERCISE IV. Give me some paper, ink, and pens. Take Donnez-moi papier m. encref. et plumes p\. Prenez some tea. or coffee. Putin some sugar and cream. the m. ou cafe m. Mettez-y sucre m. creme f. Offer him some cheese, eggs, butter, and milk. OJfrez-lui fromage in. oeufs pi. beurre m. lait m. Drink some wine, some beer, or some water. Eat Uuvez vin m. biere f. eau f. Mangez sone hash. Bring me some oil, mustard, hachis m. h asp. Apportez-moi 7iwi7eh.ni. moutardeL pepper, and salt Have you got any money? Has she any poivre m. sel m. Avez-vous argent m. A-t-elle wool or thread ? Is there any ripe fruit in the garden ? laine f. fil m. Y a-t-il "mvr 1 m. dans jardin in. Yes ; there are apricots, peaches, pears, and apples. il y a abricots, pcches, poires, pcinmes. OF THE SL'BSTANTiVK. 17 CHAPTER II. OF THE SUBSTANTIVE OE NOUN. 33. A Substantive or Noun is the name of any person or thing that exists, or of which we have any notion ; as, Alexandre, Alexander ; Londres, London; homme, man ; maison, house ; vertu, virtue. Substantives are either proper or common. The substantive proper, or proper name, is the name appropriated to one person, or one thing only ; as, Calvin, Milton, France, Paris, Dublin. The common noun is that which belongs to persons, or things of the same kind; as, homme, man; arbre, tree; which appellation equally suits all men, all trees. Among common nouns, we must distinguish the col- Icctive nouns ; so called, because, although used in the singular number, they present to the mind the idea of .several persons or things. Collective nouns are divided into general and partitive. The former express a whole body ; as, arme'e, army ; foret, forest. The latter express only a partial number ; as, multitude, multitude ; quantite, quantity. OF THE FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF FRENCH SUBSTANTIVES. GENERAL RULE. 34. THE plural of Substantives, either masculine or feminine, is formed by adding an s to the singular; as, le pere, the father. la mi-re, the mother. IViifiint, the child. le moment, the moment. les percs, the fathers. les meres, the mothers. les enfants,* the children. les moments,* the moments. It was formerly a general practice, and it is still retained by some, to leave out tlic t in the plural of nouns and adjectives ending in ant and ent, but at the present day the adjective lout (all) is the only word In which the French Academy drops IK' ( In the plural masculine; as, Tmis les parents. A II the relations. Tous les habitants.-V.loK/rmif.J AH tht inttabitanU. To Inut might be added gent, plural gens; but gent singular is only used In familiar poetry ; ns, in ?e>il martcmjejis", the marshy tribe. B 1 8 OF THIS SUBSTANTIVE. EXCEPTIONS TO THE GENERAL RULE. 35. EXCEPTION I. Nouns ending in s, ar, ov z } in the singular, remain the same in the plural ; as, le lis, the lily. la voix, the voice. le nez, the nose. les lis, the lilies. les voix, the voices. les nez, the noses. EXERCISE V. The trees of their orchards. The flowers of our gardens. arbre leurs verger fleur nos jardin The palaces of the kings. Buy me four pounds of walnuts. palais roi Achetez-moi quatre livre noix The fashions of the French. T 'he crosses of the knights. mode Francois croix chevalier The laws of those countries. The movements of the armies loi ces pays mouvement armte The spoons and forks are on the table. He has cuiller et art.fourchette sont sur f. II a three sons and two daughters. The lilies of the fields, trois fils deux fille champ 36. EXCEPTION II. Nouns ending in aw, eu, ceu, or ow, take an x instead of an s in the plural ; as, chapeau, hat. jeu, game. vceu, vow. bijou, jewel. byou, hibou, chapeaux, hats. jeux, games. vceux, vows. bijoux, jewels. hiboux, owls. owl. 37. The following nouns in ou, conform to the general rule, taking an s in the plural : clou, nail. coucou, cuckoo. filou, pickpocket. fou, fool. licou, halter. sou, penny. trou, hole. verrou, bolt. EXERCISE VI. A fleet of twenty ships. The boats of the sailors. flotte f. vingt vaisseau bateau matclot He (found himself) between two fires. Owls are 11 se trouva entre deux feu art. sont des nocturnal birds. The knives are on the sideboard. 'nocturnes ^oiseau couteau sur buffet in. (There are) many pickpockets in London and Paris. 11 y a beaucoup de jilou Londres et a OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 1 9 Fill up those holes. Give him six pence. Our doora Remplissez ces Donnes-lui sou Nos porte have bolts. He has sold the pictures and the jewels, out 32 verrou vendu tableau 38. EXCEPTION III. Most nouns ending in al or ail in the singular, form their plural by changing the final al or ail into aux; as, canal, canal. hopital, hospital. travail, work. canaux, canals. hopitaux, hospitals. traraux, works. 39. The following nouns in al and ail take an s in the plural : attirail, apparatus, imple- bal, ball. [ments. carnaval, carnival. di'tail, detail, particulars. eventail, fan. gouvernail, helm, rudder. portail, portal. regal, treyt. 40. A!EUL, CIEL, CEIL, have two plurals. Singular. Meaning. Plural. - , /grandfather, ------ a'ieuls. \ ancestor, forefather, ----- a'ieux. nd -f s ky> neave . n > ------ deux. \ sky in a picture ; or, tester of a bod, - dels ceil eye, -------- yeux. (onl-de-boeuf, bull's-eye, (architectural term), makes in the plural, ozils-de-bcenf.) Btoail, subst. masc. sing., and Bestiaux, subst. masc. pi., are synonymous, both meaning cattle. EXERCISE VII. The horses of the generals. The marshals of France. cheval general marechal The English admirals These corals are beautiful. The balls "anglais l amiral Ces corailsontsuperbes. bal of the nobility. He sells funs. Our Saviour noblesse f. II vend 32 iveiitail Notre Sauveur ascended into heaven in presence of his disciples Open monta d art. del pi. en presence de ses Ouvrez your eyes She has the portraits of her two grandfathers. * art. ceil Elle a ses deux His forefathers have filled high stations. onj reiHpli de gramlts chanjes. 20 OF THE ADJECTIVE. CHAPTER TTI. OF THE ADJECTIVE. 41. AN Adjective is a word which expresses some quality or distinction ascribed to a substantive. Adjective, from the Latin adjectus, signifies added to. A word is known to be an adjective, when it can be properly joined with the word personne, person ; or chose, thing. Thus, fidele, faithful, and agre'dble, agreeable, are adjectives, because we can say, une personne Jidele, a faithful person ; une chose agre'able, an agreeable thing. In English, the adjectives never vary on account of gender and number, but in French they change their termination, in order to agree, in gender and number, with the nouns or pronouns to which they relate. OF THE FORMATION OF THE FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES. GENERAL RULE. 42. The feminine of adjectives is formed by adding an e mute to the masculine singular ; as, Masc. Fern. prudent, prudente, prudent. grand, grande, great. court, courte, short. Masc. Fern. joli, jolie, pretty. age, agee, old, aged. petit, petite, little, small. EXCEPTIONS. 43. EXCEPTION I. Adjectives ending in e mute (that is, e not accented), remain the same in the feminine; as, nnjeunegaryon, a young boy. \ une jeune fille, a young girl EXERCISE Vin. Their house is small, but it is very pretty. Leur maison f. est mais elle est ires That street is narrow and dark The meat is cold; the Cede rue f. etroit et obscur fiande f. froid water is hot. This pear (is not) ripe. Avoid can f. cJtaud Cette poire f. nest pas nmr Ecitez OF THE ADJECTIVE. 21 bad company That girl is very cunning. She art. mauvais compagnie f. Jille f. ruse Elle lias a black gown and a red scarf. The eldest sister a *noir *robe f. 3 rouge ^echarpe f. *ahie *sceur is a model of filial piety. (She is) a clever woman. modelem. '* *pietef. C"est habile femme. 44. EXCEPTION If. Adjectives ending in / change that letter into ve for the feminine ; as, Masc. Fern. actif, active, active. bref, breve, brief, short. Masc. Fern, neuf, neuve, new. vif, rive, lively. 45. EXCEPTION III. Adjectives ending in x change the x into se ; as, Masc. Fern. heureux, heureuse, happy. jaloux, jalouse, jealous. Masc. Fern. paresseux, paresseuse, idle. vertueux, vertueuse, virtuous. 46. The following in x form their feminine thus : Masc. Fern. doux, douce, sweet, mild. faux, fausse, false. Masc. Fern. roux, rousse, red. vieux, vieille, old. EXERCISE IX. Is she attentive ? Catherine de Medicis was ambitions, Est-elle attentif etait ambitieux imperious, and superstitious ; she was a native of Florence. imperieux et superstitieux * natif de Joshua (brought down) the walls of the proud Jericho Josue fit tomber viur orgueilleux Jericho f. Tlie Italian language is sweet and harmonious. That 2 ilalieime l langue f. doux harmonieux Cctte news is false. The new tower is in the old town. nouvelle f. faux *nenf l lour f. dans vieux ville f. 47. EXCEPTION IV. Adjectives ending in e/, eil, ien, on, and et, form their feminine by doubling the last con- sonant, and adding an e mute after it ; as, Masc. Fern. cruel, cruelle, cruel. pareille, similar. ancienne, ancient. Masc. Fern. chretien, chreticnne, Christian. bon, bonne, good. net, nette, clean. 1'ret, read'/, makes prete in tlic feminine. 22 OF TlIE ADJECTIVE. 48. The following adjectives in et and cr follow the general rule, but take a grave accent over the e before the final / or r in the feminine : Masc. Fein. complet, complete, complete. incomplet, incomplete, incomplete, discret, discrete, discreet. indiscret, indiscrete, indiscreet. inquiet, inquiete, iineasy. secret, secrete, secret. cher, chere, dear. fier, fiere, proud. premier, premiere, first. dernier, derniere, last. EXERCISE X. The soul is immortal. I (am reading) ancient history. dme(. est immortel Je Its artfancien^histoiref.hin. "\Ve are in the nineteenth century of the Christian Nous sommes dans dix-neuvieme siecle m. 2 chretien era. She (is not) pretty, but she is good That poor 1 ere f. Elle n' est pas joli mais est Cettepauvre woman is dumb. Are you ready, my dear sister ? Your femme muet Etes-vous ma saur f Votre mother is very uneasy That person is extremely indiscreet, mere tres personnel, extr&nement 49. EXCEPTION V. Adjectives ending in eur, formed from a participle present by the change of ant into eur, make euse in the feminine ; as, Participle. Masc. Fern. connaissanf, connaisseur, connaisseuse, knowing, a judge, ftnttant, flatteur, flatteuse, flattering, a flatterer. mentor^, menteur, menteuse, lying, a liar. trompan^, trompeur, trompeuse, deceiving, deceitful. OBSERVATION. Words of this sort are real adjectives, though for the most part used as substantives. About a hundred of them follow this rule, 50. The following must be excepted, as they form their feminine by changing eur into eresse : Masc. demandeur, defendeur, enchauteur, pcclicur, veiigeur, Fern. demanderesse, defenderesse, enchauteresse, pecheresse, vengeresse, a plaintiff, a defendant, enchanting, a sinner, avenging, an avenger. OK TITE ADJECTIVE. 23 f>l. Inventeur, inventor; inspectetir, inspector; per- fi'cuteur, persecutor, make, in the feminine, inventrice, inspectrice, and persccutrice. 52. As to the adjectives, or rather nouns used adjec- tively, ending in tcur, which, though derived from verbs, are not formed from a participle present, by the change of ant into eur, they change teur into trice for the feminine ; as, Masc. Fern. nccusateur, accusatfn'ce, an accuser. bienfiiiteur, bienfaifrtcr, a benefactor, a benefactress. conducteur, couductrice, a conductor, a conductress. institutcur, institutrice, a schoolmaster, a governess. Upwards of fifty nouns follow this rule. Those who know Latin will see that most nouns ending in teur and trice ar derived from the Latin words in tor and trix; as, accwalor, accusatrix, etc. 53. Adjectives ending in eur, not derived from verbs, and conveying an idea of opposition or comparison, follow the general rule of taking an e mute in the feminine ; as, Masc. Fern. nntcrieur, anterieure, anterior. citerieur, citerieure, citerior. o.xti'rieur, extcrieure, exterior. intcrieur, intcricure, interior. inferieur, inferieure, inferior. Masc. Fern. mnjeur, majeure, major. mineur, mineure, minor. posterieur,posterieure,pi)s Quatre-Tingt-onq. 86 Quatre-vingt-six. 87 Qtiatre-vingt-sept. 88 Quatre-vingt-huit. 89 Quatre-vingt-neuf. 90 Quatre-vingt-dix. 91 Quatre-vingt-onze. 92 Quatrc-vingt-douze. 93 Quatre-vingt-treize. 94 Quatre-vingt-quatorze 95 Quatre-vingt-quinze. 96 Quatre-vingt-seize. 97 Quatre-vingt-dix-sept. 98 Quatre-vingt-dix-huit. 99 Quatre-vingt-dii-neuf. 100 Cent. 101 Ccntun. 102 Cent deux. 200 Deux cents. 1000 Mille. 10,000 Dix mille. 1,000,000 Million. OF THE ADJECTIVE. The proportional denotes the progressive increase of things ; as, U double, the double ; le triple, the triple ; le centuple, a hundred-fold. 72. REMARKS. I. The ordinal numbers, the collective and distributive nouns take an s in the plural ; as, Les premieres douzaines. ].es sept huitiemes. The first dozens. The seven eighths. 73. II. Vingt and cent are the only cardinal numbers which take an s in the plural, that is, when preceded by another number which multiplies them ; as, Quatre-nn^s chevaux. Cinq cents soldats. Eighty horses. Five hundred soldiers. The preceding remark holds good when the noun is understood ; as, Xous dtions deux cents. \ We were tico hundred (persons.) 74. III. But, when, vingt and cent are followed by another number, or used for the date of the year, they do not take an s / as, Quatre-rm^f-dix chevaux. Cinq cent vingt soldats. L'an mil sept cent quatrc- ringt. A/inety horses. Five hundred and twenty soldiers. In the year one thousand seven hundred and eighty. 75. IV. Mille, a thousand, never takes an s in the plural ; but, mille, a mile, takes one : thus, dix mllle is ten thousand, and dix milles means ten miles. In men- tioning the Christian era, mille is abridged into mil ; as, Napoleon mourut en MIL hurt cent vingt et un. A'apoleon died in one THOUSAND tight hundred and twenty-one. 76. V. The French make use of the car dinal numbers, 1st, In mentioning all the days of the month, except the first : thus we say, le deux mars, the second of March ; le quatre mai, the fourth of May ; and, le premier mai, the first of May ; le premier juin, the first of June. Rote. Voltaire used to say, le deux de mars, le quatre de mai; and Racine le deux mars, le quatre mai. With regard to grammatical correctness, the first con- struction is certainly preferable ; but if we follow usage, which, as to language, is the rule of opinion, we must say le deux mars, le quatre mai. It is thus that our good authors almost always express themselves, as well as those persons who pique themselves on speaking purely, and who avoid every kind of affectation, OF THE ADJECTIVE. 35 2(7, In speaking of sovereigns ; as, Guillaume guatre, William the fourth. The first of the series is excepted, for we say Jacques premier, Henri premier, and not Jacques un, Henri un ; but we say indifferently, deux or second. Henri deux, roi de France. Catherine deux, impe'ratrice de Kussie. (ACAD.) Fransois second succdda a Henri tecond, (GIEABD.) Henry the second, king of France. Catharine the second, empress of Russia. Francis the second succeeded Henry the second. Tu speaking of the Emperor Charles V, and of Pope Sixtus V, we say Charles-Quint, Sixte-Quint. EXERCISE XXI. America was discovered by Christopher Columbus, in art. Amerique f.fut decouverte par Christophe Colonib * the year one thousand four hundred andninety-two We have anm.* * Nousavons eighty (men of war) ready to sail, we (shall soon have) vaisseaux de guerre prets f air e voile en aurons bientot two hundred. Our troops took five thousand prisoners. Nos troupes firent prisonnier (It i*) four miles from this. Send me the 'first l iwo dozens. 11 y a mille m. id. Envoyez-moi Your letter of thefiftcenth of January preached me) on Votre Icttre f. * Janvier m est parvenue * the first of February. I arrived on the second. * fevricr. suis arrive * EXERCISE XXU. Louis the sixteenth, Louis the eighteenth, and Charles the tenth, were brothers. Francis the first, king of France, and etaient frere Francois Frederick the second, king 1 of Prussia, were great warriors. Frederic Prusse, etaient de grand guerrier Louis ths thirteenth was the founder of the French Academy. est fondateur 2 * Academic f. Charles the fifth, king of France, was surnamed the wise fut surnomme sage. Pope Sixius the fifth was contemporary to Philip thesecond, art. papa elait contemporain de Philippe ^on of the emperor Charles th>' fifth James I, and ITenrylV 36 OF THE ADJECTIVE. OBSERVATIONS on WORDS which arc alike in FRENCH and ENGLISH. 77. There are many nouns and adjectives which are alike in both languages, with the exception of the differ- ence in pronunciation, and that some require accents in French ; and there are others which differ merely in their termination. n Most words are alike in both languages, when ending ace ice ns J"P lace > preface, race, trace, face, grimace, 1 ( avarice, justice, injustice, service, vice, etc. nrlt 11 rlfl [arcade, brigade, cavalcade, se*re"nade, forti- \ tude, multitude, prelude, prude, etc. ance encr -f distance, ignorance, tempdrance, eloquence, ' ' " (. evidence, patience, silence, etc. . . f constant, e"le"gant, elephant, instant, absent, ' ' "( accident, compliment, excellent, etc. .. , (docile, ductile, reptile, versatile, globule, iu,uie, -J bile, mule, ridicule, etc. ; , f miracle, obstacle, oracle, receptacle, spec- " "I tacle, tabernacle, etc. . f cardinal, fatal, local, moral, principal, ge"ne"ral, " ( naval, royal, liberal, radical, etc. i . f cable, charitable, fable, table, probable, ' " \ Bible, eligible, visible, noble, double, etc. ( age, cage, charge, image, page, rage, college, ( deluge, refuge, forge, orange, siege, etc. ine, - doctrine, famine, he"ro'ine, machine, etc. i on f action, education, instruction, legion, na- " \ tion, opinion, passion, question, etc. 78. Most English words ending in a.ry, ory, our, or, oils, cy, ty, and y, become French by changing these terminations in the following manner: ary into aire, as military, milit aire. ory - oire, jj victory, mctoire. our cur, 5) favour, faveur. or - eur, 5, doctor, docteur. ous ., eux, 55 famous, fameux. cy - cc, n constancy, Constance. OF THE ADJECTIVE. 37 ty (after a vowel) into te, as beauty, beaute. *{the > 3&)K i > fuT,/ne; modesty, woda/ie. 79. Most proper names of women and goddesses ending in , become French by changing that a into e mute ; as, Julia, Julie. Minerva, Minerve. Sophia, Sophie. Diana, Diane. EXERCISE XXIII. The sagacity of that animal is admirable. That f. cet m. est instrument is very harmonious. The history of the Royal in. ires h mu. Society. The rector of an academy. He has the approbation !f. f. a f. of the nation. His memory is extraordinary. The valour of f. Sa f. f. tluit general is regulated by prudence. His courage is ce reglee par art. f. Son m. invincible. The number of stars is incalculable. noinbre in. art. etoile Give this nosegay to Maria or Louisa. Flora was the Donncz ce bouquet m. a ou a etait goddess of flowers, and Pomona, the goddess of fruits. decsse art. flcur art. EXERCISE XXIV. The weathercock is the symbol of inconstancy. The ijirouettc f. symbole m. art. prosperity of the ^yicked is not durable An ambitious }'. mediants pi. * soul is seldom capable of moderation. It is sometimes '<''/ f. run aunt qiulquefois difficult to distinguish the copy from the original. The sublimity difficile de distinguer f. * in. f. of his sentiments is still superior to the energy of his ses in. encore f. scs expressions. Magistrates and physicians formerly rode f. mi. magistral art. medccin 2 autr(ft think of oneself. I ., f ondoitparlerrarement") people should seldom speak themselves, s , . > f ., , ' ( de sot, J of themselves. EXERCISE XXVIII. He submits himself to your orders. Th?t lady praises soumct vos ordre Cette dame loue herself (too much.) She gives herself (a great deal) of trop. donne beaucoi/p trouble. They expose themselves to danger. They peine. exposent art. in. will accustom themselves (to it.) (Every one) works for s accoutumeront l 2 y Chacun travaille pour himself. The loadstone attracts iron to itself. aimantm. attire art./erm. Virtue is amiable mi/self. He will soon correct him M If. art. rcrtu f. cst aimablc de. * *bientvt y corrigera l 42 OF POSSESS1VF. PKOXOTJXS. 89. II. OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. TUB Possessive, as well as the Demonstrative Pronouns, are of a mixed nature, partaking of the properties both of pronouns and adjectives ; therefore some Grammarians class them among the adjectives ; others refuse them the name of pronouns or adjectives, and place them in the rank of articles. Indeed, it would be difficult to state, within a moderate compass, the various opinions of Gram- marians respecting this part of speech. As for us, we shall follow here the classification adopted by the Frencli Academy, and by the most correct modern writers, and divide the Possessive Pronouns of the old Grammarians into two classes : 1st, Possessive A effectives ; 2d, Possessive Pronouns; And, from the affinity these tAvo kinds of words have Avith each other, we shall place them one after the other in separate articles. 90. OF POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. The Possessive adjectives denote possession or property, and are called adjectives rather than pronouns, because they do not stand for a noun, but, on the contrary, are always joined to a noun. They are : Singular. Plural. Masc. Fern. For both genders. mon ma mes my ton ta tes thy son sa ses his, her, its notre notre nos our votre votre vos your leur leur leurs "their 91. OBSERVE. (1.) The possessive adjectives, as well as the preposition which may accompany them, must be repeated before every noun, and agree with it in gender and number. OP 1'OSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 92. (2.) The possessive adjectives always agree in French with the noun following, and never with the preceding one ; that is to say, they agree with the object possessed, and not with the possessor, as in English. 93. (3.) For the sake of euphony, mon, ton, son, are used instead of ma, ta, sa, before a feminine noun be- ginning with a vowel or h mute. EXERCISE XXIX. My father, mother, and brothers are in the country. pere mere frere sont a campagnc f. His uncle, aunt, and cousins are in Wales. 1 oncle tante in. sont dans le pays de Gallcs. have seen Paris, its theatres, and building's Our perseverance ai vu thedtrem. edifice m. perseverance f. and our efforts Your country and your friends. Their m. pays m. ami m. house and their servants. Her son is learned. His sister maison f. domestique fils est savant. sceur is married. My ambition, thy honesty, and his friendship. mariee. f. honnetetei.\\m. amitie f. My brother has lost his pen, his pencil, and his books. ' y pit livre m. a perdu plume i. crayon m. My mother has sold her house and her garden. vcndu jar din m. 91. OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. These pronouns always relate to some noun spoken of before, with which they agree in gender and number. The posbessive pronouns are : Singular. Plural. Masc. le mien le tien k- sien Fern. la miennc la tienne la sienne Masc. les miens les tiens le.s siens Fern. les miennes les tiennes les siennes mine thine his, hers, iti le notre Ic votrc le k-ur la notre la votrc la Icur PI. for both genders. les not res les votres les leurs ours I/ours theirs EXERCISE XXX. (I lore i.s) your hat, (don't take) mine. IIU Void chnpeau m. ne prcncz pas 44 OF DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES. house and mine have been burnt, but theirs (has not) maison f. et ont ete brulees mais n'a point suffered. Your books are better bound than mine. My souffert. livrcm. sont relies que watch (does not go) so well as hers. Your garden is montre f. ne va pas si que jardin m. cst larger than ours, but our orchard is larger than yours. plus grand verger in. You have taken my gloves, and (I have) taken yours. avcz pris gant m. moi fat I know your relations, but I (don't know) theirs, connais parent m. pi. ne connais pas 95. III. OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. We shall divide the Demonstrative pronouns, as we have done the Possessive, into two classes : 1st, Demonstrative Adjectives; 2d, Demonstrative Pronouns. 96. OF DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES. The Demonstrative adjectives always precede a substan- tive, which they designate and point out. They are : CE, before a noun masculine singular, begin- ning with a consonant, or h aspirate. This, or that, GET, before a noun masculine singular, begin- ning with a vowel, or h mute. CETTE, before any feminine noun. ^ ij, ICES, before any noun in the plural, whether e, or those, -J raascu i in J c O r feminine. 97. RULE. The Demonstrative adjectives must be repeated in French before every noun, though in English this, that, these, those, arc frequently used before the first noun only, and understood before the others ; as, C lioramcs, ces femmcs, ct cet I These men, women, and children cnfanUjouent are playing. EXERCISE XXXI. This picture, that bird, this doll, these flowers, and tableau m. oiseau m. poupee f. fleur et those shells are (my sister's) Taste this wine. Take cof/uillage sont amasceur. Goutcz vinm.Prenez one of these biscuits. Those boys and girls (are going) to in. gar$on fille vont OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 45 school. Give him this book and that slate. Th st art. ecole Donnez-lui Here m. ardoise f. cups and saucers (are not) clean. This cake is for you. tasse soucoupe ne sontpas propre gdteau m. pour 98. OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. These pronouns serve to point out the persons or things which they represent. They are : Singular. Plural. Masc. Fern. Masc. Fern. ce - - this, that, it. |j No plural. celui celle that. ceux celles those. celui-ci celle-ci this. ceux-ci celles-ci these. celui-la celle-la that. ceux-la celles-la those. ccci cela _ this. \ that. f No plural. CK, demonstrative pronoun, differs from ce, demon- strative adjective, in this, that the former is always joined to the verb etre, to lie, or followed by giti, or que ; whereas the latter is always followed by a substantive. Thus, in this phrase : CE qui me plait, C'EST sa modeslie, what (that which) pleases me is his modesty, CE is a demonstrative pronoun ; and it is a demonstrative ad- jective in the following : CE juge est incorruptible, that judge is incorruptible. When ce does not come immediately before a sub- stantive, it answers for both numbers and genders ; as, De toutcs Ics vertus cellc qni se fait Ic plus cMrir, e'est 1'humanitd. Ce furent les PWnicicns qui Invcn- 0/all the virtues, that irhieh malet itself most bflorej is humanity. It vat the J'haenicians vho inrenkd tircnt 1'ecriture. (Bosscrr.) trritiny. The French Academy remark that ce joined to the verb etre generally forms a gallicism. 99. The Pronouns celui, celle, ceux, celles, always relate to a noun expressed before ; as, Void votre livre, ofr est celui dc votrc frfere? J'admire Irs troiluctions dc Pope ct Here it your book, vhere is that of your brother t / admirt the translations o/ Popt ar.d I'.tvscr" 46 OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 100. When tivo or more objects have been spoken of, cdui-ci, celle-ci, ceux-ci, celles-ci are used with reference to the nearest, and celui-la, celle-la, ceux-la, celles-la refer to the most distant, or first-mentioned object ; as, Voici deux pi&tolets, lequcl choisis- gez-vous, celui-ci ou celui-la f I.c corps pdrit, 1'flmc est immortelle ; cependant nous ne'gllgeons celle- ci, et nous sacrlflons tout pour celui-la. Jlere are two pistols, which do you choose, tliis or that? The body perishes, the soul it im- mortal; yet we neglect the latter. and sacrifice everything for the former. This last example shows also that the English word.?, the former, are likewise expressed by celui-la, celle-la, ceux-la, celles-la, and the latter by celui-ci, celle-ci, ceux- ci, celles-ci, according to the gender and number of the substantive to .which they relate. REMARK. LA means there, and ci is an abbrevia- tion of icr, here; so that CELUI-CI is equivalent to this here, and CEI.UI-LA, to that there. 101. Ceci, this, and cela, that, are never followed by a noun, nor used with reference to a noun mentioned before ; they -stand for something pointed at, but not named ; they have no plural, and are both masculine. Ceci est bon, mais cela est mauvais. Donncz-moi ceci, ct gardez cela. This it good, but that is bad. Give me this, and keep that EXERCISE XXXII. It is a misfortune. (Here is) your umbrella, and that of est malhcurm. Voici parapluiem. your cousin. Bring my scissors, and those of my m. Apportez ciseaux in. pi. sister. Which of these watches (will you have), this or sceur. Laquelle montref. voulez-vous ou that ? (Here are) fine pictures, buy these or those. Voici de beau tableau m. achelez Give this to (the lady) and that to (the gentleman) An Donnez madame monsieur. iipright magistrate and a brave officer are equally *integre l magistrat m. officier m. sont egalement estimable; the former makes war against domestic TT fait art. guerre f. d art. 2 domestique enemies, the latter protects us against foreign enemies l ennemim. pi. protege contre &rt. 3 exterieur l OF RELATIVE 1'ROKOUX!'. 47 102. IV. OF RELATIVE PRONOUNS. Relative Pronouns arc those which relate to a notm or pronoun, or phrase going before, which is thence called the antecedent. The relative pronouns are : qui, que, quoi, lequel, donl, ou, en, y. ( )F qui, que, quoi, lequel, dont. 103. Qui, QU, ,QUOI, arc of both genders and numbers. EXAMPLES. I , f Dieu qui est juste, Cod -who is just. qui, < *" ' (la dame qui parle, the lady who is speaking. ( which, les oiseaux qui chantenf, the birds winch are sinying. a qni, said of per-1 , fie garcou a qui} the boy to whom sons only, J ' ( j'dcris, j I am writiny. (whom, 1'homme qiie vous voyez, the man whom you see. ^ ' ( which, les livres que vous lisez, the looks which you read. , ("voila de quoi je voulais ") that is what 7 wished to quoi, w a , - vous ar j er - seak to ou about p ar j er) j- speak to you about. REMARK __ Que loses the e before a vowel ; qui never changes. 104. LEQUEL is a compound of quel, and of the article le, with which it incorporateslin the following manner : Singular. Plural. lequel duquel auquel laquelle de laquelle a laquelle lesquels clesquels auxquels lesquelles desquelles auxquelles which, of which to which. This pronoun is used with reference to persons and things, with which it always agrees in gender and num- ber. EXAMPLES of lequel. , , ,., ( le fauteuil sur lequel \e suis ( the arm-chair on lequel, m . which, -J assiS) -| v}llcllJaHlsitlili;i . . ,. , . 7 (Vest une raison i laquelle j {t { n r " wo " to which laquelle,/. winch, -J n - y a point de ^^^j there can le no rc- c'est une de ses sccurs, mais ] il '* / his f' s , lers ' ' ludo not knov. 48 OF RELATIVE PKONOUNS. 105. DOKT is of both genders and numbers, and is used when speaking of persons or things : it supplies the place of duquel, de laquelle, desquels, desquelles, de quoi, but is never used in asking a question. Kote.Dont is never used in asking a question, that is you never begin a ques- tion with dont; but, in the body of an interrogative phrase, the word is perfectly correct ; as, Oil est la/emme DONT rousparlezt Where is the woman of tchom you speak ? EXAMPLES of dont. f , , , , ,. , . (it is an illness, tie of which, | cest une aladie , dont On 4 cause of which is ' 1 ne connait pas la cause, | unk *own. dont,< f ^ 1,1 j f i 1 the man of whom you ' j of whom, I homme dont vous parlez, -j , , ( la nature dont nous igno- ( nature, whose secrets s ' ( rons les secrets, ( are unknown to us. 106. Qui, que, quoi, lequel, are called relative pronouns absolute, when they have no antecedent, and only pre- sent to the mind a vague and indeterminate idea. In this case qui is employed only in speaking of per- sons, que and quoi in speaking of things. Lequel marks a distinction, and is used in interrogative sentences, when asking which person or thing among several. EXAMPLES. r qui^quelle personnej est | who & ^ f \ who > . ( . , ) 7 don't know who Juts qui, \ I je De SalS * M 6St ** / arrived. (qui appelez-vous ? whom do you call? I whom, | con d s ^ z tez ?"*' ^ ous vou - ^cons-alt ^om you please, (queCquelle chose) cher- } what fl? . ^ see} ,. que, what, -< chez-vous t j (_ je ne sais que faire, / don't know what to do. ( k quoi (a quelle chose) ~\ whzt are you thinking , . pensez-vous? j" off quoi, (a, j ^MOJ de plus aimable que) what nzore aj/ii'ai/e choose which you please. (_ voudrez, j f faquelle de ses sceurs est ) which of his sisters is OF RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 49 107. OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN ou. Ou is a relative pronoun when used instead of lequcl, laquelle, lesquels, lesquclles, preceded by a preposition. Tliis pronoun is employed only in speaking of things, and is of both genders and numbers. EXAMPLES. L'instant ou nous naissons cst un pas vers la inert (VOLTAIRE.) La inaison ou je tlemeure. (AcAD.) Les pays par oC j'ai passe". The instant in which we are lorn is a step towards death. The house in which / live. The countries through which / have passed. EXERCISE XXXIII. The The man who reasons. The lady whom I see. raisonne. dame vois. sciences to which he applies. Here is the gentleman f. pi. s'appliqne. Void monsieur of whom you speak. With whom do you live ? What parlez. Avec demeurez-vous? (shall we do) to-day? Which (do you like) best of those ferons-nous aujourcfhuif aimez-vous three pictures? The child to whom everything yields tableau in. enfant m. tout cede is the most unhappy. The state in which I find myself. malheureux. etat m. me trouve. 108. OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN en. EN, a pronoun of both genders and numbers, is some- times used in speaking of persons, although it is chiefly said of things, and places : its principal function is to avoid the repetition of a word or phrase already ex- pressed. It signifies of him, of her, of it, from it, nj them, some of it, some of them, any, &c. EXAMPLES. II aime Ics auteurs fran^ais, il EN parle souvent. Cette muladie est dangereuse, il pourrait EX mourir. A-t il des protectcurs ? oui, il EN a de tri's-puissants. Vous parlez d'argcnt, EX avtz- vous? oui. j' K.N iti. He likes French authors, he often speaks of them. Tlml illness is daiitjcroiis, fie miyhi die of it. Has he any protectors ? yes, he has some very powerful ones. You talk of money, have ymi any ? r/es, I have some. 50 OF RELATIVE PRONOUNS, 109. OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN y. T, a pronoun of both genders and numbers, is some- times employed with reference to persons, but its use is almost strictly confined to things : it corresponds to the English to him, to her, to it, to them, in it, in them, therein, &c. EXAMPLES. Je connais cet homme, je ne m'r fie pas. II aime 1'etude et S'Y livre entiere- ment. J'ai re9U sa lettre, J'Y re"pondrai. Vos raisons sont bonnes, je m'r rends. J'y ai remarque" quelques fautes. I know that man, I do not trust to him. He loves study, and devotes him- self entirely to it. / have received his letter, I shall answer (to) it. Yovr reasons are good, I yield to them. I observed some faults in it, or c them, A3T* Some Grammarians class en and y among the personal pronouns. N. B. Th'e pronouns en and y are always placed before the verb, except with an Imperative affirmative. [See, in the Chapter on the Adverb, what is said upon Y, adverb.] EXERCISE XXXIV. Read his letter, and tell me what you think of it. -'- Lisez lettre f. dites-moi ce que pensez Give me that, I (am in want) of it. Are you going to Donnez-moi ai besoin Allez-vous Edinburgh? I come from it (Here are) strawberries, will Edimbourg viens Void 32 fraise voulez you have any ? I will give you some. Take some donnerai Prenez more. I consent to it. Put your signature to it. davanfage. consens Mdtez Those arguments are conclusive ; I see no reply m. sont concluant n' vois point de replique to them. The undertaking is difficult, but you entreprise f. difficile metis (will succeed) m it. They will gain nothing (by it), reussirez n' gagneront rien y OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 51 HO. V. OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. Some pronouns are called Indefinite, because they de- note persons or things in an indefinite or general manner. They are the following: on, quiconque, quelqu'un^chacun, autrui, personne, I'un Vautre, I'un et Vautre. 111. ON, one, they, we, people, it, &c. On is a contrac- tion of the Latin word homo, man. This pronoun is of very extensive use in the French language; it is em- ployed when speaking in general terms, without desig- nating any particular person : it has commonly a plural meaning, hut always requires the verb to be in the third person singular. EXAMPLES. O.v ne peut lire Telemaque sans devenir meilleur. ON dit que nous aurons bientflt la paix. Ox pease que la nouvelle est vraie. Ox apprend mieux ce que 1'ox com- prend, que ce que TON ne corn- One cannot read Telemachus with- out becoming better. They, or people, say we shall soon have peace. It is thought tliat the news is true. We learn better what we under- stand, than what we do not. prend pas. REMAUK. For the sake of euphony, the pronoun on lakes an I, with an apostrophe (!'), after the words et, si, uu, que, qui, and quoi ; as, Et fon dit, "j f et on dit. ^i /'uu savait, I si on savait. Oil /'on veut, \ instead of / oil on veut. Ce que /"on comprend, I I ce qu'on comprend. Ceux a qui ton doit, J ^ ceux a qui on doit. However, on remains the same when the word follow- ing it is le, la, or les ; we say : et on le dit, si on le savait, and not et Von le dit, si Von le savait. L'on for on should never begin a sentence, although .some authors have not always observed this rule. 112. QUICONQUE, whoever, whosoever, any person what- ecer. This pronoun has no plural, and is used only with reference to persons ; as, nque a dit cela n'a pas dit la Quiconquc me trompera sera puui. Whoever said so, has not the truth. [punished. Whoever deceives me shall be 52 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. Quiconque is generally masculine ; however, when it evidently relates to a female, the adjective is put in the feminine; as, Mesdames, quiconque de vous sera assez hardie pour me*dire de moi, je Ten ferai repentir. (AcAD.) Ladies, whoever of you shall be bold enough to speak ill of me, I will make her repent it. 113. QUELQU'UN, somebody, some one. EXAMPLES. J'attends quelqu'un. Quelqu'un me 1'a dit. I wait for somebody Somebody told me so. This pronoun takes gender and number; thus:- Quelques-uns, m. pi. ") Quelques-unes,/. pi. j Qnelqu'un de ces messieurs. (luelqu'unc de ces dames. Quelqu'un m'adit. J'ai lu quelques-uns de ces livres. Connaissez-vous quelques-unes de ces dames ? Oui, j'en connais quelques-unes. some, several, out of a greater number. Some one of these gentlemen. Some one of these ladies. Somebody told me. I have read some of those looks. Do you know any of those la- dies ? Yes, I know some of them. 114. CHACUN, m., CHACUNE, /., every one, each; with- out plural. Chacun vit a sa maniere. Every one lives after his own way. Chacune de ces demoiselles. Each of these young ladies. Un chacun, much used by old writers, is now obsolete. [See page 55, what is said on chaque, every, each.] 115. AUTRUI, others, other people. (From the Latin alterius, gen. of alter, other.) This pronoun is masculine, and has no plural ; it is generally preceded by a prepo- sition, and is used in speaking of persons only. La charite* se rejouit du bonheur d'autrui. .Ne faites pas a autrui ce que vous ne voudriez pas qu'on vous fit. Charity rejoices in the happiness of others. Do not to others, what you would not wish others to do to you. 11G. PERSONNE. This pronoun is always masculine and singular. When it means no person, nobody, no one, it requires the negative ne before the verb. OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 53 EXAMPLES. Personne ne sera assez liardi. Je n'ai vu personne. Nobody will be bold enough. I have seen nobody. "When personne is used without a negative in interro- gative sentences, and those expressing doubt and uncer- tainty, it means any person, any body, any one. EXAMPLES. Y a-t-il personne d'assez hard! ? Je doute que personne y re"us- sisse (ACAU.) Is there any body bold enough f I doubt whether any one will suc- ceed in it. PERSONNE, as a noun, is always feminine, and is used both in the singular and plural ; it means a person, a man or woman, people. EXAMPLES. C'cst une personne de mdrite. C'est une personne tres-instruite. Des pcrsonnes bien intentionndes. He is a man of merit. She is a very well-informed person. Well-intentioned people. 117. L'UN L'AUTRE, m., L'DNE L'AUTRE, /. ; LES UNS LES AUTRES, 771. pi., LES UNES LES AUTRES, /. pi. ; one another, each other. This pronoun is employed in speaking of persons and tilings. Uun I'autre is used with reference to two, and les uns les autrcs with reference to more than two. If there be any preposition, it must be placed between lun I'autre, and not before, as is the case in English before one another or each other. EXAMPLES. Us se louent I'un I'autre. Les soldats s'excitaient les uns les tuttfet, Us purient mal fun DE Fautre. They praise one another. ' The soldiers excited one another. They speak ill OF each other. 118. L'UN ET L'AUTRE, m., L'UNE ET L'AUTUE, /. ; LEg UNS ET LES AUTRES, m. pi, LES UNES ET LES AUTRES, /. pi. ; the one and the other, both. EXAMPLES. L'un et I'autre sont bons. [fait. Ijiineet faufrerapportentlc ini'mc Us se re'tmiitttent let MIS ct les uutres coutre 1'cnncmi. Both are good. Uoth relate the same circumstnnre. They all united against the ena- rny. 54 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS When I'un et Vautre is followed by a noun, it is no longer an indefinite pronoun, but an adjective ; as, I'un et Vautre CHEVAL, both horses ; I'une et Vautre SAISON, both seasons; Vune et Vautre DEMANDS, both requests. I5F Many Grammarians class TEL among the Inde- finite pronouns ; but it is a real adjective, and agrees in gender and number with a noun either expressed or understood ; as, une telle action, such an action ; de tels animaux, such animals ; tel (homme understood) rit aujourd'hui, such as laughs to-day; telle (femme under- stood) se croit belle, such a one thinks herself beautiful. [For any further explanation respecting the Pronouns, see the Syntax.] EXERCISE XXXV. One lias often need of a (person inferior) to oneself. a souvent besoin phis petit m. que soi. They say he is learned God (will punish) whosoever dit qu' est Dieu punira transgresses his laws. Somebody has taken my umbrella. transgresse loi a pris parapluie m Every one (will read) in his turn. We (must not) covet lira a tourm. II ne faut pas desircr the property of other people Pride becomes nobody, bien m. art. orgueil m. convient & EXERCISE XXXVI. Fire and water destroy each other. I have art. feu m. art. eau f. se detruisent ai read the Iliad and the ,Eneid, both have delighted me. lu Iliade f. Eneide f. ont enchante People who have (little to do) are very great talkers ; art. gens m. peu d'affaires de parleur the less one thinks, the more one speaks. Each of them resolved moins pense plus parle. resolut to live as a g-entleman. . He who chooses badly for himself, de vivre en * gentilhomme. * choisit soi chooses badly for others. Some assert the contrary. assurent contraire m. OF INDEFINITE PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 55 119. OF INDEFINITE PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. We shall treat here of the indefinite pronominal adjec- tives, on account of their affinity with the indefinite pro- nouns ; these adjectives are : chaque, nul, aucun, pas un, meme, plusieurs, tout, quelconque, quel, quelque. 120. CIIAQUE, every, each, is of both genders, and with- out plural. This word must not be confounded with chacun ; chaque is always followed by a noun ; chacun, on the contrary, is never joined to a noun (see page 52). EXAMPLES. Chaque fige a ses plaisirs. Every age Tias its pleasures. Chaque science a ses principes. Every science has its principles. 121. NUL, m., NULLE, /. ; AUCUN, m., AUCUNE, /. ; PAS UN, 7?i., PAS UNE, /. ; none, no, no one, not one, not any. These expressions have nearly the same meaning when accompanied by the negative ne placed before the verb. EXAMPLES. No man is perfect. You have no proof; no, not AW homme n'cst parfait. Vous n'avez aueune preuve j non, 2>cts une. : N.B. No, in answer to a question, is translated by one. N0. 122. M&ME, same, self, like, alike; plural, MEMES ; of both genders. EXAMPLES. C'est le meme homme, la m&me personne. Lea cendres du berger et du roi sont les memes. It is the eame man, the same person. The ashes of the shepherd and the king are alike. Meme is often placed after a substantive or a pronoun, to give more energy to the expression. EXAMPLES. C'est la bonte" meme. Le roi \\ii-rneine s'y opposa. Nous le ferons nous-weme*. She is kindness itself. The king himself opposed it. We will do it ourselves. Meme is also an adverb ; then it is invariable, and means even, also. This is the etiarn of the Latin. OF INDEFINITE PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. EXAMPLE. Wcmen and even children were killed. Les femmes et meme les enfants furent tues. 123. PLUSIEURS, several, many. It is of both genders and lias no singular. EXAMPLES. Plusieurs historians ont raconte. En plttsieurs occasions. Plusieurs tie vos amis. Several historians have related. On several occasions. Many of your friends. 124. TOUT. There are various kinds of this word. (1.) Tout, indefinite pronominal adjective, meaning every, each, any, any one ; the quisque of the Latin. In this sense, lout never takes an article nor a pronoun, and is always singular. EXAMPLES : Every citizen ought to serve his country. Every labour deserves a reward. doit servir son Tout citoyen pays. Toute peine meVite salaire (Ac.) (2.) Tout, adjective, all, whole; in Latin, tolas, omnis : Tout le monde ; toule la terre ; tons les hommes. Tout 1'hoinme ne meurt pas. (3.) Tout, adverb, quite, entirely, however ; in Latin, omninb, plane : All the world; all the earth ; all men. The whole man does not die. Elle Cut tout e"tonnee. Nos vaisseaux sont tout prcts. She was quite astonished. Our vessels are quite ready. O3T Tout, adverb, becomes adjective, or at least agrees like one, in gender and number, when immediately followed by an adjective or participle feminine, be- ginning with a consonant, or h aspirate ; as, Elle dtait toute changee. Elle en est toute honteuse. Toutes spirituelles qu'elles sont. She was quite altered. She is quite ashamed of it. Witty as they are. (4.) Tout, substantive masculine, the whole; the tolum of the Latin : Ne prenez pas le tout. ] Do not take the whole. 125. QUELCONQUE, whatever, whatsoever. When used with a negative, it is nearly synonymous with nul, aucun ; it is invariable, and is always placed after a noun ; as, II n'y a homme quelconque. Tliere is no man whatever. 11 n'y a raison quelconque. There is no reason whatsoever. When used without a negative, it admits of a plural ; as, Deux points quclconqitcs.-(A.CAD.) [ Two points whatsoever. OF INDEFINITE PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 126. QUEL, m., QUELLE, /. / QUELS, W. pi., QUELLES, /. )>L, what. This pronominal adjective is used principally in interrogations and exclamations, or to express uncer- tainty and doubt. It is always followed by a noun ex- pressed or understood, with which it agrees in gender and number. EXAMPLES. Qwe/mattre? Quetle dame? Quels lirrcs, quelles brochures lisez-vous ? Quel bonheur ! (iuel homme vous 6tes ! II ne sait quel parti prendre. J'ai des nouvelles & vous apprendre. Quelles (nouvelles) sont-elles ? What master ? What lady? What books, what fixmplueU do you read? What happiness! What a man you are ! He knows not what course to take. I have news to tell you. What u ft 9 127. QUELQUE, $., QUELQUES, pi., some, is of both gen- ders, and is always joined to a noun. Quelque autcur en a parle". II y a (pulques difficulties. EXAMPLES. Some author has mentioned it. There are some difficulties. Quelque, in this sense, corresponds to the aliquis of the Latin. (Acad., and the modern Grammarians.) Quelque, with que before the succeeding verb, means whatever. This is the quantuscunque, quantacunque of the Latin. EXAMPLES. Quelque soin qu'on prenne. Quelque raison qu'il ait. Quclques efforts que vous fassiez. Whatever care one may take. Whatever reason he may have. Whatever efforts you may make. But should quelque be followed by the verb etre, to be, it is written in two words (quel que) ; in this case, quel must agree in gender and number with the subject of the verb. This expression answers to the qualiscunque of the Latin. EXAMPLES. Quelte que soil votre intention. Quelg que soicnt vos desseins. Quclles que soient vos vues. (AcAD.) Whatever your intention may be, Whatever ymir desiyns mat/ be, Whatever your views mat/ If.. 58 OF INDEFINITE PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. Quelque, followed by an adverb or an adjective without a noun, is considered as an adverb, and is invariable ; it corresponds to the English however, howsoever, and to the Latin adverb quantumvis ; as, Quelque bien Merits que soient ces ouvrages, ils ont pen de succes. Quelque puissants qu'ils soient, je ne les crains point. (ACAD.) However well written these works may be, they have little success. However powerful they may be, 1 do notfe.ar them. Quelque, when immediately followed by a cardinal number, is also considered as an adverb ; then, it means about, neaify, some, and answers to the circiter of the Latin. In this sense, quelque is of the familiar style ; as, Alexandra perdit quelque trois cents hommes, lorsqu'il defit Porus. Alexander lost some tliree hundred men, ichen he defeated Porus. EXERCISE XXXVII. Every country has its customs No one is dissatisfied with pays m. a coutume n'est mecontent de his own understanding 1 . No reason can justify a * jugement m. raison f . ne pent justifier le falsehood. It is the same sun that (gives light to) all mensongem. C'est soleilm. qui eclaire the nations of the earth. It is virtue itself. Divide the f. pi. tern f. art. vertu f. Divisez whole into several parts. The whole fleet is at sea. Every en partie 2 1 flottef.estenmer. truth (is not) proper (to he told). Any pretext whatever, veritef. n'est pas bon a dire. Unpretextem. EXERCISE XXXVIII. No one is satisfied with his fortune, nor dissatisfied with hU n' content de f. ni own wit. No road of flowers conducts to glory * esprit m. cheminm. ne conduit art. 78 What lesson have you learnt ? (There are) some defects in leconf. avez- apprise? II y a defaut dans that picture. Whatever your talents f (may he), you tableau m. m. pi. soient (will not succeed) without application. She is quite wet. ne reussirez pas sans mouillee. These ladies were quite surprised to see him. furent surprises de 2 voir 1 OF THE VERH. 59 CHAPTER V. OF THE VERB. 128. FRENCH VERBS are divided into five kinds : Active, Passive, Neuter, Pronominal, and Impersonal, or rather Unipersonal, besides the two Auxiliary Verbs, avoir, to have, and etre, to be. There are FOUR CONJUGATIONS in French, which are distinguished by the termination of the Present of the Infinitive. The first ends in ER, as, parler, to speak. ... second ... IR, ... jinir, to finish. ... third ... OIR, ... recevoir, to receive. ... fourth ... RE, ... vendre, to sell. In each of these Conjugations, there are regular, ir- regular, and defective verbs. A verb is called regular, when all its tenses take ex- actly the terminations of one of the four model conjuga- tions, which are inserted hereafter in their proper places. A verb is called irregular, when, in some of its tenses, it takes terminations different from those of the conju- gation to which it belongs ; and it is termed defective, when it is not used in some tenses or persons. As the compound tenses of all verbs are formed by the help of avoir, to have, and etre, to be, for which reason these two are called auxiliary verbs, they take precedence of the four principal Conjugations, instead of being classed among the irregular verbs to which they belong. " It may not," says Lindley Murray, " be generally proper for young persons beginning the study of grammar, to commit, to memory all the tenses of the verbs. If the simple tenses be committed to memory, and the. n/st carefully perused, the business will not be tedious to the scholars, and their progress will be rendered more obvious and pleasing." Without wishing to dictate any particular method of tuition, we think the preceding remark of the celebrated English Grammarian peculiarly applicable to the learning of French verbs. Let the scholar be iirst made familiar with tflfe simple tenses, and he will find the rest an ex- tremely easy task. The most part of Anglo-French Grammarians mix the simple and compound tenses ; in this Grammar they are kept separate, but pre- sented at one view, side by side ; so that while the student is learning a tinijilc tense, he also forms an acquaintance with its compound. 60 AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 129. CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB A VOIR, TO HAVE. PRESENT. Avoir, to have. PARTICIPLE PRESENT. Ayant, having. INFINITIVE. PAST. | Avoir eu, to have had. COMPOUND OF PARTICIPLE PRESENT. | Ayant eu, having had. PARTICIPLE PAST. Eu, m., cue,/., had. INDICATIVE. Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. PRESENT. PRETERITE INDEFINITE. J'ai,* 1 have. J'ai eu, / have had. tu as, thou hast. tu as eu, tJtou hast had. il, or elle a, he, or she has. il a eu, he has had. nous avons, we have. nous avons eu, we have had. vous avez,f you have. vous avez eu, you have had. ils, or elles out, they have. ils ont eu, they have had. IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. J 'avals, I had. J'avais eu, / had had. tu avals, ihou had&t. tu avais eu, thouhadsthad. il avait, he had. il avait eu, he had had. nous avions, we had. nous avions eu, we had had. vous aviez, you had. vous aviez eu, you had had. ils avaient, they had. ils avaient eu, they had had. PRETERITE DEFINITE. PRETERITE ANTERIOR. J'eus,f / had. J'eus eu, / had had. tu ens, thou hadst. tu eus eu, thouhadsthad. il cut, he had. il cut eu, he had had. nous eumes, we had. nous eumes eu, we had had. vous eutes, you had. vous eutes eu, you had had. ils eurent, they had. ils eurent eu, they had had. We write/at, and pronounce./^ t AH the second persons plural of the simple tenses end with z or * with*, -when the preceding e is pronounced with the sound of a In the English alphabet ; as, vous avez, vous parlieznnA with s, when the same e Is not pronounced at all ; aa, vous efttes, vousfaites, Que j'ale eu. That J may ] que tu ale*, that thou mayst j quo tu ales eu, that thou mayst qu'il alt, that he may j? qu'il ait eu, thut he may ^ que nous ayons, that ice may $ que nous ayons eu, that ice may que voiis aycz, that you may qitc vous aycz eu, that you may qu'ils aient, that they may J qu'ils aient cu, that they may j IMPERFECT. PLCPERFECT. Qucj'cusse, That I might -j l Quej'cussc cti, That I mi'jht -j que tu cusses, that thou mightst [ que tu cusses eu, that thou mightily qu'il t-Qt,* that he might ^ qu'il eQt eu, that he might % lue nous eussions, that tee might $ que nous eussions cu, Hint ice might * rjue vous eusslcz, tlmt you might \ que vous cussiez eu, that you might p. qu'llg eusscnt, that they might J qu'ils cusstnt ca,t that they might j The third person singular of the Imperfect of the Subjunctive of all verbs take* a circumflex accent over the vowel that precedes the final*,- as, qu'fi eiit, qu'il ehantdt, qu'il Jinlt, qu'il vicut, Ac. f Uy omitting que, this tense Is nlso used for the Conditional past 62 EXERCISES ON AVOIR. 130. REMARK I. In the following Exej^ses, the noun being used in a partitive sense, it will ol^iecessary to place before the noun either du, de la, de I', or des, ac- cording to the directions given, Rule III., page 16. EXERCISE XXXIX. INDICATIVE. PEES. I have money. He has wealth. argent m. bien m. She has patience and sweetness. We have relations and - f. douceur f. parent friends __ You have gold and silver. They have ambition ami or m. argent m. m. - f. and perseverance. They have pomegranates and pineapples. perseverance f. f. grenade f. ananas m. IMPERF. We had umbrellas and cloaks. You had parapluie m. manteaum. muskets, rifles, pistols, and artillery. They had fusil m. carabine f. pistolet m. artillerie f. swords, lances, pikes, pitchforks, bows, and arrows. epeef. - f. pique f. fourchef. arc m. flechef. PRETERITE DEFIN. I had strawberries She had raspberries. /raise f. framboise f. We had gooseberries. You had cherries. They had grapes. groseille f. cerise f. f. raisin m. EXEECISE XL. Peter lias talent and experience. You have courage and Pierre - m. experience f. - m. firmness. John and James have walnuts and filberts. Jane fermete f. Jean Jacques noix f. aveline f . Jeanne had prudence and riches. He has had good luck. We ind-2 - f. richesse pi. bonheiir m. shall have soup or fish. Andrew shall have oranges and soupef. poissonm. Andre - f. lemons. Louisa and Martha shall have figs and plums __ . citron m. 79 79 figue prune f. That we may have had snow, rain, and wind. Having ncige f. phiief. vent m. eyes, see ye not ? Having ears, hear ye not ? 40 nevoyez- point? oreillef. n'entendez- EXERCISES ON AVOIR. 63 \ 4 . [. ThV ad v.; 131. REMA^| II. The addition of an adjective, after the noun, mflR no difference as to the use of du, de la, de /', des. But, the adjective must agree with the noun, in gender and number. See Rules, p. 20 and 25. EXERCISE XLI. INDIC. PEES I have red ink. She has clear and 2 rouge ^encre f. 2 cla !r just ideas. We have ripe pears. You have sincere friends. *juste ^ideef. ^mur^oiref. 'sincere l Margaret and Sophia have green parasols and purple shawls. Marguerite Sophie *vert l - ra. 'violet l chdlem. FUT. ABS. We shall have white curtains. You will have -blanc true and real pleasures. They will have new houses. 9 vrai S r4el *laisirrn. *neu l maisonf. SUBJ. PBES In order that I may have ready money. A/in 2 comptant * That you may have enlightened judges and faithful servants. 'eclaire \jugem. 2 fidele l domestique 132. REMARK III. But, if the adjective comes before the noun, then, only de, or d', is to be used before the adjective, instead of du, de la, de I', des, without any regard to the gender or number of the noun. I have some good snuff. He has good brandy, and ex- 47 tabacm. eau-de-vie f. cellent wine. We have beautiful walks in our town. 77 vinna. beau promenade?, dans She had great qualities. We shall have had long sufferings __ ind-2 grand qualitef. 58 sovffrance f. I should have fine pictures and pretty engravings. You would 58 tableavm. joli gravuref. have great advantages. That you may have good reasons to avantage m. raison f. give him. Have you not better pens to lend me? . donner lui N' pas 70 plume f. d preter I have very good pens, but bad ink, and bad paper. trw mats mauvais 64 EXERCISE ON AVOIR. Recapitulatory EXERCISE upon the three foregoing Remarks. He has credit, power, authority, and riches. We credit m. puissance f. autorite f. richesse f. pi. shall have wine, beer, and cider. Let us have politeness __ biere f. cidre m. politesse f. We have white bread, delicate meat, and delicious wines __ 2 blanc l pain m. 2 delicat l viande f. 2 delicieux l That they may have prepossessing 1 manners. She has excellent l maniere f. qualities.^ They have small apricots, but large peaches. petit abricot m. gros peche f. 133. CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB ETRE, TO BE. INFINITIVE. PRESENT. PAST. Eire, to be. \ Avoir e"te, to have been. PARTICIPLE PRESENT. COMPOUND OF PARTICIPLE PRESENT. Etant, being. \ Ayant e"te", having been. PARTICIPLE PAST Etd,* been. INDICATIVE. Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. PRETERITE INDEFINITE. Je suis, I am. J'ai i). let him />. let us be. be (you), let them be. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. PBETEBITT. Quejc sols, That 1 may be. Que j'ale 6tf, That I <:t'i/ ) que tu sola, that t/iou mayst tit. quc tu ales 616, that thou mayst g- qu'il soit, that he may be. qu'll ait 616, thai ht may % quu lions soyoIH, that u-f may be. quo nous ayous etc, >ay 9 quo vous soyoz, that you may be. que vous ayez 616, may 2 qu'ilH soiont. that they may be. qu'ils alent 616, that they i,iy J LUPEBFECT. rLoratnor. Quo Jc Cusse, quc tu fusses, qu'il (Vit, que nous fussiuns, que vous fnsslcz, qu'ilslussi-nt. That J might be. thai thou miyhtst be. that he iniijht be. tt.at we miyhl be. (hat you miijht be. th'.it t.'iey iiiujht be. Quej'cussce'te', Thai f might ) que tu cusses 6\6, that tln,ti rniijhtst g- qu'il eQl Ot<5, that he miij.'it 5 quc nous CUSSIOI.R Otc, that iff miyht que vous euasiez At." 1 , tM, voumi$/ tu parlas, fhoii s]>okcst. tu ctis parle, thou hadst^ il parla, he spoke. il cut parle, he had nous parlames, we spoke. nous cumes parle", we had vous parlate.s, you spoke. ils parlerent, they spoke. vous eutes jiarle, you had Us eurcut parle, they had ' I sjieak. I do speak, or, I am peaking. Sec N. 15. p. 279. 70 FIRST CONJUGATION IN EH Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses FUTURE ABSOLUTE. FUTURE ANTERIOR. Jc parlerai, I shall ~| tu parleras, thou shall k il parlera, he shall nous parlerons, we shall . vous parlerez, you shall '! ils parleront, they shall J J'aurai parle, tu auras parle, il aura parle", nous aurons parle, vous aurez parle, ils aurout parle", , -I shall x have spoken. CONDITIONAL. PRESENT. PAST. Je parlerais, I should tu parlerais, thou shouldst [ il parlerait, he should ^ nousparlerions,?ce should ^. vous parleriez, you should '\ ils parleraient, they should J J'aurais parle", tu aurais parle, il aurait parle", nous aunons parle, vous auriez parle", ils auraicnt parl, ~-I should have spoken. IMPERATIVE Parle, Speak (thou). qu'il parle, let him speak. parlons, let us speak. parlez, speak (you). qu'ils parlent, let them speak. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. Queje parle, que tu paries, qu'il parle, que nous parlions, que vous parliez, qu'ils parlent, PRETERITE. Que j'aie parle*, que tu aies parl^, qu'il ait pane", que nous ayons parle", que vous ayez parle, qu'ils aient parle, , That I may x have spoken. IMPERFECT. Que je parlasse, que tu parlasscs, qu'il parlat, que nous parlassions, que vous parlassicz, qu'ils parlassent, PLUPERFECT. 3 1 ^ ' Tha hav Que j'eusse parl^, que tu eusses parl^, qu'il cut parl^, que nous eussions parl^, * que vous eussiez parW, |"(- qu'ils eussent pane, ? S 1 EXERCISES ON THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 7 146. Conjugate in the same manner all the regular \ 7 erbs terminating in er ; as, Accepter, to accept. chanter, to sing. chercher, to seek. danser, to dance. demandev, to ask. dormer, to give. ferraer, to shut. flatter, to flatter. garder, to keep. louer, to praise. montrer, to show. porter, to carry. eViter, to avoid. j raconter, to relate. EXERCISE XLIV. INDICATIVE. PRESENT. I study geography and etudier art. geographic?. history. He dines at five o'clock. We admire the tai.Mtkrirtt.kn. diner hcure admirer heauty of that landscape. You forgive your enemies beautef. paysagem. pardonnerct, enncmi Your brothers and sisters sing and dance very well. 91 IMPERF. I was accusing my friend. He was listening accuser ami ecouter attentively. We were blaming our neighbours You were attentivement. bldmcr voisin proposing a salutary advice. They were praising your prudence proposer a l avis m. f. The ancient Peruvians worshipped the sun. ancien Peruvien adorer soleilm. EXERCISE XLV. PUET. DI:F. I approved his action. She sung two or three approuver 93 f. songs. He borrowed money. We declined his offer. chanson emprunter 32 argent m. refuser 93 offre f. You rewarded the servant. They declared war. recompenser domestique m. declarer art. guerre f. PRET. INDEF. I have surmounted all the difficulties. He surmonter tout dijficulteL has offended his Majesty. We have bought an estate. They offenser MajesteL aclieter . terref. have considered the justice of his demand. At all times, considerer f. demande f. Dans art. gold has been looked upon as the most precious metal, art. regarder comme des pi. 72 EXERCISES ON THE FIRST CONJUGATION. EXERCISE XLVI. PLLTERF. I had asked his consent. The queen had demander consentement m. manifested her displeasure. We had consulted men montrer mecontentement m. consulter 32 of honour. You had emptied the bottle. They honneur h m. vider bouteille f. had repaired the house. lie had tuned my piano. reparer maison f. accorder m. Fur. ABSOL. I shall cross the river. She will travel traverser riviere f. voyager with us. We will breakfast with you. You will shut the avec dejeuner fermer shutters. They will bring letters and newspapers. volet m. apporter 32 lettre f. 32 journal m. CONDIT. PRESENT . I would explain the rule. He would expiiquer regie f. avoid his company. She would prepare the ball dresses compagnie f. preparer habit de bal. We would walk faster. They woiild gain the victory. marcher plus vite. remporter victoiref. EXERCISE XL VII. IMPERATIVE Give me his address and yours Letua Donner -ladresse f. frequent good company James, carry this letter to the frequenter art. porter lettre f. pest-office. Ask, and it shall be given you; seek, and you poste f. on ind-7 shall find; knock, and it shall be opened unto you-^- trouver frapper on ouvrira * SUBJ. PRESENT. That I may re-enforce my party That renforcer parti m. he may appease his anger. That you may find friends. apaiser colere f. des IMPERF. That I might prove the truth. That she might prouver verite f. remain in town That they might take advantage of the rester en ville. profiler circumstances. Thatyou. might imitate his conduct. circonstance f. ^^W***^ imiter conduite f. SECOND CONJUGATION IN 1R. 7 a MODEL OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION IN IR. 147. FINIR* TO FINISH. Finir, INFINITIVE. PRESENT. PAST. to finish. I Avoir fini, to have finished. PARTICIPLE PRESENT. COMPOUND OF PART. PRESENT. Finissant, finishing. \ Ayant fini, having finished. PARTICIPLE PAST. Fini, finished. Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. INDICATIVE. PRESENT. Je finis, I finish. tu finis, thoufinishesl. il finit, he finishes. nous finissons, ice finish. vous finissez, you finish. ils finissent, they finish. I.MPERFECT. Je finissais, I was ^ tu finissais, thou wast *> il finis.sait, he was nous finissions, we were ~T Tons finissiez, you were S ils finissaient, they were } PRETERITE DEFINITE. PRETERITE INDEFINITE. J'ai fini, / have finished. tu as fini, thou hast finished. il a fini, he has finished. nous avons fini, we have finished. vous avez fini, you have finished. ils ont fini, theyhavefinished. PLUPERFECT. J'avais fini, tu avals fini, il avail fini, nous avions fini, yous ayicz fini, ils araient fini, I had thou hadst he had we had you had they had PRETERITE ANTERIOR. Je fini.s, tu finis, il finit, nous finimes, vous finites, ils finirent, I finished, thoufinishedst. he finished, wefinished. you finished, they finished. J'eus fini, tu eus fini, il eut fini, nous eumes fini, vous eutes fini, ils eurent fini, I had - thou hadst ^ he had |. we had you had -y* they had J FUTURE ABSOLUTE. Je finiraS, I shall finish. tu finiras, thou shall fim.oh. il finira, he shall finish. nousfinirons,wc shall finish. vous finirez, you shall finish. ils finiroht, they shall finish. FUTURE ANTERIOR. J'aurai fini, / shall hare -\ tu auras fini, thou shall have'-$> il aura fini, he shall have g- nous aurons fini, we shall have ? vousaurez fini, you shall have ^ ils auront fini, they shall have J The final R of the Infinitive of the 2d Conjugation l always sounded. SECOND CONJUGATION IN 1R. Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. CONDITIONAL. PRESENT. Je finirais, I should ~\ tu finirais, t hou shouldst J^ il finirait, he should & nous finirions, we should ^ yotis finiriez, you should '\ ils finiraient, they should ) PAST. J'aurais fini, I should tu aurais fini, thou shouldst il aurait fini, he should nous aurions fini, we should yous auriez fini, you should ils auraient fini, they should IMPERATIVE. Finis, qu'il finisse, nnissons, fiuissez, qu'ils finissent, Finish (thou). let him finish, let us finish, finish (you). let them finish. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. Que je finisse, That I may ~| que tu finisses, that thou may st'^ qu'il finisse, that he may que nous finissions, that we may gj que vous finissiez, that you may '< qu'ils finissent, that they may ) IMPERFECT. Que je finisse. que tu finisses, qu'il finit, que nous finissions, que vous finissiez, qu'ils finissent, PRETERITE. Que j'aie fini, que tu aies fini, qu'il ait fini, que nous ayons fini, que vous ayez fini, qu'ils aieut fini, PLUPERFECT. Que j'eusse fini, que tu eusses fini, qu'il cut fini, que nous eussions fini, que vous eussiez fini, qu'ils eussent fini, 148. Conjugate in the same manner: Abolir, adoucir, affermir, agir, applaudir, avertir, batir, choisir, clemolir, divertir, cmbellir, emplir, II P sH S-3 to abolish. ' enricbir, to enrich. to soften. etablir, to establish. to strengthen. fldchir, to soften. to act. fournir, to furnish. to applaud. franchir, to leap over. to warn. fr^mir, to shudder. to build. garantir, to warrant. to choose^ guerir, to cure. to demolish. nouiTir, to nourish, to feed to divert. ob^ir, to obey. to embellish. punir, to punish. tofill. r^iwsir, &c. to succeed, toe. EXERCISES ON THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 75 EXERCISE XLVIII. 1XDICAT. PKES. I shudder when I think (of i quand 3 penser l y fulfils his promise. Your sister enjoys good remplir promessef. joinr d'une health You act as a master. They punish the idlers. santef. en * maitre. paressetix IMTERF. I was varnishing' a picture. He was climbing vernir tableau m. gravir the hill. They were building 1 a bridge and fortifications. colline f. bdtir pont m. 32 f. PRET. DEF. I warned my sister of her danger. You avertir m. chose a pretty colour They succeeded in their undertaking 1 joli couleur f. reussir entreprise f. That victory strengthened him on his throne. trdne m. EXERCISE XLIX. FRET. LVDEF. I have chosen it (out of) a thousand. enlre * He has enriched science with new discoveries You enrichir art. f. de nouveau decouverte f. have grown tall. The greatest empires have perished. grandir m. perir PRET. ANT I had done before him. When he had finir avant lui. Quand filled his pockets with pears and apples, he went away. remplir poche de poire de pomme s'en alia. PLUPERF. That merchant had supplied this house marchandm. fournir maisonf. with wine. The king had ennobled him They had disobeyed de anoblir desobcir my orders. He had warranted my watch for six months. a ordre m. montre f. mois. EXERCISE L. Fur. ABSOL. I will search into that affair. That will approfondir affaire f. cure him. We will rebuild our country-house. I hope giterir 87 rebdtir maison de campagne. cspercr you will succeed They will obey the laws of the country. quc reussir obeira loif. paysm. 76 EXERCISES ON THE SECOND CONJUGATION. FUT. ANT. I shall have finished my exercise before dinner. themem. avant diner. That bad news will have cooled his ardour. nouvelle f. refroidir 93 ardeur f. COKDIT. PRES. I would mitigate the punishment adoucir punition f. If he (were to do) that good action, everybody would f aisa.it f. tout lemonde 'applaud 1 him. He would stun the neighbourhood. applaudir lui etourdir voisinage m. EXERCISE LI. IMPERATIVE. Let us banish vice and cherish bannir art. m. chirir virtue. Act as a man of honour. Choose of the art. vertuf. en * honneurhm. two. Reflect for a moment. Blush with shame. Reflechir * m. rougir de honte h asp. SUBJ. PRES. That I may accomplish my design. That accomplir dcssein m. you may establish communications between these two towns. etablir 32 entre IMPERF. That she might match the colours. That you assortir couleur f. might enjoy your glory. That they might soften his heart. jouir de gloire. attendrir cceurm. EXERCISE LII. That we might have fathomed that mystery. That they approfondir mystere m. might have fed the poor, and cured the sick. All pauvre pi. malade pi. Tout that we build is of short duration. Let him bless ce que court duree f. benir art. Providence. God will punish the ungrateful. I shall finish f. Dieu ingrat m. pi. my translation this evening. I have converted him. That traduction f. soir m. cdtivertir town was swallowed up by an earthquake. The engloutir un tremblement de terre. torpedo benumbs the hand of him who touches it. torpillef. engourdir celui toucher THIRD CONJUGATION IX 01R. 77 MODEL OF TIIE THIRD CONJUGATION IN OIR. 149. RECEVOIR, TO RECEIVE. INFINITIVE. PRESENT. Reccvoir, to receive. PARTICIPLE PRESENT. Recevant, receiving. PAST. Avoir re9ii, to have received COMPOUND OF PART. PRESENT. Ayant regu, having received. PARTICIPLE PAST. Regu, received. Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. INDICATIVE. PRESENT. PRETERITE INDEFINITE. Je rcgois, I receive. J'ai regu, / have ~) tu regois, thou receivest. tu as regu, thou hast ^ il reyoit, he receives. il a re9U, he has nous rcccvons, we receive. nous avons regu, we hace vous recevez, you receive. vous avez regu, you hace ?>* Us resoivent, they receive. ils out regu, they have j IMPERFECT. I'LUPEUFECT. Je recevais, I was ~\ J'jivais regu, J had ~) tu recevais, thou wast 2 tu avais re9U, thou hadst % il reccvait, he was 8. il avail ro9U, he had nous recevions, we were nous avions re9U, we had vous receviez, you were <3 vous aviez royu, you had ? Us recevaieut, they were ) Is avaieut regu, they had ) PRETERITE DEFINITE. PRETERITE ANTERIOR Je rec.us, / received. J'eus regu, 7 had \ tu rc^us, thou receivcdsl :u ens re9U, than hadst ^ il re?ut, he received. J cut regu, /ie Aarf nous guinea, we received. ^ous eumes rcyu, ire //a d vous refutes, you received. Us re9ureut, they received. vous eutcs rc9u, t/ow had &, Is curent re9U, Mey //atZ J FUTURE ABSOLUTE. / FUTURE ANTEKlUIt. Je rccevrai, 7 thall "I Faurai regu, I shall ^ tu recevras, thou shall Jj u auras re9U, Mo?i s/arl6, il n'aura pas parle, nous n'aurons pas parle, yous n'aurez j>as parle, ils n'auront pas parle, ? a s s VERB WITH A NEGATIVE. 85 Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. CONDITIONAL. PRESENT. PAST. Je ne parlerais pas, tu ne parlerais pas, il ne parlerait pas, nous ne parlerions pas, TOUS ne parlericz pas, ils ne parleraieut pus, Je n'aurais pas park', tu n'aurais pas park-, il n'aurail pas park', nous n'aunons pus park',' yous n'auriez pas parh', ils n'auraient pas parle, , o A, it BirEIlATIVE. Ne parle pas, qu'il no parle pas, ne parlous pas, ne parlez pas, qu'ils ne parlent pas, Do not speak, let him not speak, let us not speak, do not speak, let them not sjyeak. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. PRETERITE. Que jc ne parle pas, que tu ne paries pas, qu'il ne parle pas, ( que nous ne parlinns pas, que vous ne parliez pas, qu'ils ne parleiit pas, IMPERFECT. Que jc nc parlasse pas, que tu ne parlasses pas, qu'il ne parlat pas, que nous ne parlassions pas, que vous ne parlassiez pas, qu'ils ne paiiassent pas, Que je n'aie pas park', &- 3 que tu n'aies pas parle, a fi qu'il n 'ait pas pane, N que nous n ayons pas parle",^ | que vous n'ayez pas parle, j"-sj qu'Us u'aient pas park', ? PLUPERFECT. Que je n'eusse pas parlo, s- 9 que tu n'eusses pas parle, 8. qu'il n'eut pas parle, [parle ' * .. - que vous n'eussiez pas parl<5 ft- a* qu'ils n'eussent pas parl<5, ? EXERCISE LVUI. INDICAT. TRES. I have no change. The butcher has monnaic. bouchcr m. no mutton. My sister docs not sing 1 . We do not speak of mouton. chanter that. You do not answer his letters. They are not playing repondre a lettre joner 86 EXERCISES UPON VERBS AVITII A NEGATIVE. IMTERF. I did not expect that of you She was not attendre dancing. You were not thinking 1 of him They were not danser penscr a happy. The king was penniless, the queen had no money. heurenx sans le sou argent. EXERCISE LIX. PRET. DEF. 1 did not receive his note in time. lie billet m. cL temps. did not forget his promise. She did not hear him. oublier promesse f. entendre PRET. INDEF. I have not yet received his answer. encore reponse f. He has never ppoken to his colonel. You have not brought apporter the parcel. Your brothers have not passed this way. paquet m. passer par ici. PLUTERF. I had not finished my exercise when you came. theme m. quand vintes. EXERCISE LX. Fur I shall not speak to him any more. We will not travel 86 voyager this year. You will never succeed in that undertaking. annee f. reussir entreprise f. COND. PRES. I would owe nothing. You would not devoir wait long. They would never pardon him. attendre longtemps. pardonner lui IMPERA Let us not imitate Ms conduct. Do not lose imiter conduite f. perdre your time. Don't shut the window. Don't wait for me. temps m. fermer fenetre f. attendre Never yield to the violence of thy passions. Let us f abandonner f. f. not act against him. Receive no more of his letters. Do agir lui. not spread that bad news. Do not be so idle. repandre mauvais nouvellef. paresseux VEKB CONJUGATED INTERROGATIVE!,!*. 87 157. CONJUGATION OF A VERB INTERROGATIVELY. PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 158. (1.) To conjugate a verb interrogatively, which can be done only in the Indicative and Conditional Moods, we place the pronoun, which serves as the sub- ject or nominative, after the verb, connecting them by a hyphen; as, Avez-vous? have you ? Jouez-vous? do you play? 159. (2.) In compound tenses, the pronoun is placed between the auxiliary and the participle, joined to the former by a hyphen ; as, Ai-je parle? have I spoken ? Ont-ils dine? have they dined ? 160. (3.) When the third person singular of a verb ends with a vowel, for the sake of euphony, we place between the verb and the pronoun, the letter t, preceded and followed by a hyphen ; as, Aura-t-il? will he have ? Danse-t-elle? does she dance? 161. (4.) When the subject or nominative of a verb is a noun, that noun comes first, and one of the pronouns i7, elle, ils, elles, is placed after the verb, and joined to it by a hyphen ; as, Mesfreres parlent-ils ? do my brothers speak ? Votre sceur aurait-elle chante? would your sister have sung ? 162. (5.) When the first person singular of a verb ends with an e mute, an acute accent is placed over that ] aurais-tu donne? g3 aurait-il donne" ? ^ 5 unions-nous donn<5 ? 5- S. auriez-vous donne ': K^ aura i en t-ils donne ? ^ J Donnerais-je ? Should I donnerais-tu ? shouldst thou^) donncrait-il ? should he "2. donnerions-nous ? should we doiineriez-vous ? should you J* donneraient-iLs ? should they EXERCISE LXI. INDICATIVE. PRES. Have I friends? Is sne pleased? satisfait Does he bring good news? Does she dance well? apportcr nouvelle f. danser Has she a watch? Is breakfast ready? Do you call? montref. dejeuner m. pret appeler IMPEKF Was lie waiting for your arrival ? Were you attendre * ' arrivee f. speaking to our captain ? Had the traveller a pistol ? capitaine voyageurm. pistoletm. PRET. DEF. Did he prefer your house to hers? Did preferer maison f. they clear up his doubts ? Was he bold enough ? edaircir doute in. 2 hardi x EXERCISE LXII. I'KET. INDEF. Has the king rewarded his services ? recompenser m. Has your mother received my letter? Have your partners associem. sold my goods? Have you bought a pencil-case? merchandise f. porle-crayonm. PLLTERF. Had she offended her mistress ? Had you ojfenser maitresse forgotten the date? Had he lost his pocket-book? oiMier f. pcrdre portefeuille m. Fur. Shall I have that pleasure ? Will Miss Isabella plaisir m. ping? Shall we alight here? When shall we dine? chanti r desccndre diner 90 VKRB INTERROGATIVELY AND NKGATIVELY. 165. MODEL FOR THE CONJUGATION OF A VERB USED INTERROGATIVELY AND NEGATIVELY. REMARK. To add the negative form to a verb used interrogatively, ne is placed before the verb, and pas or point after the personal pronoun, both in the simple and compound tenses. Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. INDICATIVE. PRESENT. Est-ce que je ne perds pas 1 (for ne perds-je pas .-) ne perds-tu pas ? ne perd*-il pas ? ne perdons-nous pas ? ne perdez-vous pas ? ne perdent-ils pas? IMPERFECT. Ne perdais-je pas ? ne perdais-tu pas? ne perdail^il pas ? ne perdious-nous pas ? ne perdiez-vous pas ? ne perdaient-ils pas ? PRETERITE DEFINITE. Ne perdis-je pas ? ne perdis-tu pas ? ne perdit-il pas ? ne perdimes-uous pas ? ne perdites-vous pas ? ne perdirent-ils pas ? PRETERITE INDEFINITE. N'ai-je pas perdu ? n'as-tu pas perdu ? n'a-t-il pas perdu ? n'avons-nous pas perdu ? n'avez-vous pas perdu ? n'ont-ils pas perdu ? PLUPERFECT. N'avais-je pas perdu ? n'avais-tu pas perdu ? n'avait-il pas perdu ? n'avions-nous pas perdu ? n'aviez-vous pas perdu ? n'avaient-ils pas perdu ? PRETERITE ANTERIOR. N'eus-je pas perdu ? n'eus-tu pas perdu ? n'eut-il pas perdu ? n'euraes-nous pas perdu ? n'eutes-vous pas perdu ? n'eurent-ils pas perdu ? D takes the sound of t, when at the end of a verb followed by one of the pro- nouns il, e'.le, . ne perdront-ils pas ? CONDITIONAL. PRESENT. PAST. Ne perdrais-je pas ? "] 1 N'aurais-je pas perdu ? Q, ne perdrais-tu pas? ~ t/3 n'aurais-tu pas perdu ? ne perdrait-il pas? ~| n'aurait-il pas perdu ? S 5. ne perdnons-nous pas ? S g j n'aurions-nous pas perdu ? ^ ne perdriez-vous pas ? * s^ n'auriez-vous pas perdu ? ^ 3 ne perdraient-ils pas ? ] n'auraient-ils pas perdu ? S. EXERCISE LXIII. INDICAT. PRES. Am I not troublesome ? Is she not importun attentive ? Does your sister not draw ? Do we not walk dessiner marcher too fast? Do you not hear the drum? Do they not tropvitef entendre tambour m. ask (too much ?) Has he not enough "money ? demander tropf assez d' IMPERF. Did he not deserve your esteem and mine? mtriter estime f. Had he not a short coat and a cloak above it ? 'court l habitm. manteaum. par-dessus * EXERCISE LXTV. PRET. DBF. Why did he not answer your question ? Pourquoi repondre d f. Did she not turn the box topsyturvy? renverser botte f. sens dessus dessous f PRET. INDEF. Has he not sold again hia country -house ? revendrc maisondecampagnef Have you not signed the letter? Have they not been here signer id f 92 CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. Fux. AJJS. Will be not betray your confidence ? Will you trahir confiance f. not consult your lawyer? Will she not invite your sister? consulter avocat ? inmter 166. II- CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. The Passive verb expresses an action received or suf- fered by its subject or nominative. There is only one mode of conjugating passive verbs ; it is by adding to the verb etre through all its tenses, the past participle of the active verb. 167. Every past participle employed with the verb etre, must agree in gender and number with the subject of etre. To form the feminine, an e is added, and to form the plural, an s. 168. It has already been said (page 39), that the participle must be put in the singular, when the pronoun vous is used instead of tu; thus, we must say, in speak- ing to a man, vous etes loue' ; and, in speaking to a female, vous etes loue'e, 169. MODEL FOR THE CONJUGATION OF A PASSIVE VERB. INFINITIVE. PRESENT. PAST. Etre loud, to be praised. \ Avoir dtd loud, to have been praised. PARTICIPLE PRESENT. PARTICIPLE PAST. Etant loud, being praised. \ A rant e'te'loue', having been praised. Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. INDICATIVE. PRESENT. PRETERITE INDEFINITE. Je suis ( loue, m. tu es il or elle est ( loude, /. 1 nous sommes flouds, ;n. ! "| vous gtes -< P" \ Us or elles so tit (^loudes, f. J J'ai dtd tu as dtd il or elle a dtd (^ loude, f. nous avons dtd ( tone's, m. vous avez dtd -< ils or elles ont dtd (^ loudes, f. S CONJUGATION OF A PASSIVE VERB. 93 Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. J'e'tais ( loud, in. tu dtais < ^ ~) J 'avals 6t6 Hou^, m. <^ tu avais dte < ] il or elle dtait (_loude,y. 2 ^ il or elle avail 6t6 ( loude, f. ^ ^ nous dtions 1 loue's, ;. ' | nous avions 6i6 f louds, m. 2 * vous dtiez -< ? 1 vous aviez et^ [etd-< ' T" ils or elles dtaient (_ loue'es, /. ils or elles avaient (_ loupes, f. ?~ PRETERITE DEFINITE. PRETERITE ANTERIOR. Je fus ("loud, m. J'eus e"te floud, m. ^ tu fus ^ ^1 tu eus ct6 ^ | ] il or elle fut ( louee, y. ~ . ^ il or elle eut Gt6 ( loue*e,y. *w *"** nous fumes f loues, m. , a nous eumes ete ( \o\i4a, m. $ o* vous futes < vous eutes 4t& -< ils or elles furent (_ louees, f. ils or elles eurent(5tS (^loudes,y. '* FUTURE ABSOLUTE. FUTURE ANTERIOR. Je serai ( loud, m. J 'aurai e"td I loud, m. ^. tu seras -< tu auras e*te < il or elle sera lloude,y. *^ j 53 ^i il or elle aura dt<5 ( loude, f. ^ S^ nous serons I loues, ?n. ~. ~~ nous aurons Gt6 i loue's, m. K vous serez < S. f" vous aurez dtd 1 ' | Us or elles seront (^ louS tu serais " i. tu aurais Gt6 g g. il or elle serait ( lou&,y. "^ g. il or elle aurait Gt6 ( lou soyons ( louds, m. S.^ soyez } g_ I* qu'ils or qu'clles soient ( loudes, f. ' ^~ SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. PRETERITE. Que je sois ( loud, m. ^ Que j'aie dtd ( loud, m. **$ que tu sois que tu aies dtd [dtd j qu'il or qu'elle soit ( loude,y. ^ S. qu'il or qu'elle ait ( loude.y. J* i^, que nous soyons loues, m. ~. N que nous ayons dtd louds, 7rt.^ 2 que vous soyez s R. a que vous ayez dtd !< qu'ils or qu 'elles bnettjj. qu'ils or qu'elle.1 loudes,y. S. |* soicnt aicnt ctS m & 94 EXERCISE ON PASSIVE VERBS Simple Tenses. IMPEEFECT. Quejefusse / loud, m. g que tu fusses \ aS. qu'il or qu'elle rat lloude,/. a 1 ^ que nous fusslons quo vous fussiez qu'ilsor qu'elles fus- aent !louds, m. loudes, /. o- Compound Tenses. PLOTEKFECT. Que j 'eusse 6tG ( loud, m. s que tu eusses 6i6 1*5 qu'll or qu'elle eflt 6t6 ( lou<5e, /. a s, que nous eussions - ^ que tu te fusses promene, qu'il se fut promene, [mene-S ~ que nous nous fussions pro- i_ que vous vous fussiez promenes, J~.|. qu'ils se fussent promends, ~~-^ < Conjugate in the same manner : S'uccorder, to agree. s'adresser, to apply. s'avancer, to come or go forward. se biiig-ner, to bathe. ge baisser, to stoop. se dpecher, to make haste. s'emporter, s'enrliumer s'envoler, se faclicr, se hater, s'imaginer, so determiner, to resolce upon, se lever, c. to catch cold, to fly away, to be angry, to make haste to fancy, to rise, tfc. 98 EXERCISES ON PRONOMINAL VERBS. EXERCISE LXVI. INDIC. PRES. That woman nurses herself too much. s'ecouter trop. You wonder at that. We take a walk (every day). s'etonner de 101 sepromener tons les jours. IMPERF. I was riding- (on horseback). We were se promener a cheval. fatiguing ourselves (to no purpose). You were amusing sefatiguer inutilement. s'amuser yourself in the garden. They quarrelled with everybody. dans se disputer tout le monde. PRET. DEF. I presented myself to the assembly. He se presenter assembleef. lost himself in the crowd She laughed at his advice. se perdre foule f. se moquer de avis m. We applied to the prime minister. You perceived s'adresser premier ministre. s'apercevoir de the snare. They met several times in the street. piege m. se rencontrer 123 fois rue f. EXERCISE LXVIL PRET. INDEF. I have exposed myself. He has amused s'exposer s'amuser himself. She has revenged herself. Where did you stop ? se venger s'arreter PLUTERF. I had fallen asleep. They had grown rich s'endormir s'enrichir at your expense. He had got up at four o'clock. depens pi. se lever heures. FUT. ABS. I shall bathe to-morrow. You will se baigner demain. catch cold. I shall warm myself. He will grow bold. s'enrhumer se chauffer s'enhardir They will defend themselves well. They will fly away. se defendre IMPERA. Let us rest under the shade of this sereposer a, ombre f. tree. Rise from there, that is not your place. arbre m. se lever la ce f. REFLECTED VERB CONJUGATED NEGATIVELY. 99 178. MODEL OF A REFLECTED VEEB CONJUGATED NEGATIVELY NP 1)1.8 .<> I INFINITIVE. Simple Tenses. lt Compound Tenses. i not \ Ne S>etre P aS leV(5 ' to get up. . or levee, f. / risen. PARTICIPLE PRESENT. Ne se levant pas, PARTICIPLE PAST. !e s'e"tant nas \ not having INDICATIVE. PRESENT. Je ne me leve pas, tu ne te leves pas, il ne se leve pas, nous ne nous levons pas, vous ne vous levez pas, ila nc se levent pas, IMPERFECT. Je nc me levais pas, tu ne te levais pas, ^ il ne se levait pas, nous ne nous levions pas, * yous ne vous leviez pas, ils ue se levaient pas, PRETERITE DEFINITE. Je ne me levai pas, tu ne te levas pas, il ne se leva pas, 2. nous ne np.ua levames pas, r? vous ntf vous levates pas, ils ne se leverent pas, FUTURE ABSOLUTE . Je ne me leverai pas, tu ne te leveras pas, il jus se levcra pas, S. nous ne nous leverons pas, r? yous ne vous leverez pas, ils nc sc Ivvcront ]>as, PRETERITE INDEFINITE. Je ne me suis pas leve, ^ tu ne t'es pas leve", ^ 5>l il ne s'est pas leve", [leves, g- nous ne nous sommes pas p yous ne vous etes pas lev^s, ' | ils ne se sont pas leves, PLUPERFECT. Je ne m'e*tais pas levd, ^ tu ne t'e"tais pas levd, ^ ...,, il ne s'e"tait pas leve, [levels, H- | nous ne nous e"tions pasp vous ne vous e"tiez pas lev^s, ' ils ne s'e"taient pas lev^s, * PRETERITE ANTERIOR. Je ne me fus pas leve, K, tu ne te fus pas leve", ^ il ne se fut pas leve", [lev^s, ^- n nous ne nous fumes pas ^ yous ne vous ffites pas levfe, ' ~ ils ne se fureut pas \e\6s, "- FUTURE ANTERIOR. Je ne me serai pas leve", ^ ^ tu ne te seras pas leve", o, il ne se sera pas leve",[leves, "> noun ne nous serons pas^.K vous ne vousserez pas love's ~ ils ne sc seront pas Icv^s, ~ "-* 100 REFLECTED VERD CONJUGATED NEGATIVELY. CONDITIONAL. Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. PRESENT. Je ne me leverais pas, K, tu ne te leverais pas, . il ne se leverait pas, 3. 2 nous ne nous leverions pas, > g vous ne vous leveriez pas, s Us ue se leveraicnt pas, S. PAST. Je ne me serais pas leve, >, N tu lie te serais pas leve, g, il ne se serait pas leve, [leves * nous ne nous serious pas 3. g vous ne vous seriez pas leves 3 ils ne se seraieut pas leves, S. IMPERATIVE. Ne te leve pas, qu'il ne se Ic-ve pas, ue nous levous pas, ne vous levez pas, qu'ils ne se levent pas, Do not rise, let him not rise, let us not rise, do not rise, let them not rise. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. That I may not rise, fyc. Que je ne me love pas. que tu ne te leves pas. qu'il ne se leve pas. que nous ne nous levions pas. que vous ne vous leviez pas. qu'ils ne se levent pas. IMPERFECT. That I might not rise, fyc. Que je ue me levasse pas. que tu ne te levasses pas. qu'il ne se levat pas. que nous ue nous levassions pas. que vous ne vous levassiez pas. qu'ils ne se levassent pas. PRETERITE. That I may not hate risen, &;c. Que je ne me sois pas leve. que tu ne te sois pas leve". qu'il ne se soit pas leve. que nous ne nous soyons pas leves. que .vous ne vous soyez paa leves. qu'ils ne se soient pas leves. PLUPERFECT. That I might not have risen, tyc. Que je ne me fusse pas leve. que tu ne te fusses pas leve. qu'il ne se fut pas leve. que nous ne nous fussions pas leves. que vous ne vous fussiez paa leves. qu'ils ne se fussent pas leve*. REFLECTED VERB, INTERROGATIVELY. 101 179. REFLECTED VERB, INTERROGATIVELY. INDICATIVE. Simple Tenses. PRESENT. Me coupe-je ? or, Est-ce que je me coupe ? te coupes-tu ? BC coupe-t-il ? nous coupons-nous ? vous coupez-vous ? BC coupent-ils ? IMPERFECT. Me coupais-je? te coupais-tu ? se coupait-il ? nous coupions-nous : vous coupiez-vous ? se coupaient-ils ? PRETERITE DEFINITE. Me coupai-je ? te coupas-tu ? Be coupa-t-il? nous coupames-nous ? vous coupatcs-vous ? Be couperenHls ? FUTURE ABSOULTE. Me couperai-je ? te couperas-tu ? 86 coupera-t-il? nous couperons-nous ? vous couperez-vous ? Be couperont-iJs ? ^ Co L, Cfc ^ ^w ~". T- ^ * 32 - ,^s ^a *K ^ Compound Tenses. PRETERITE INDEFINITE. Me suis-je coup^ ? ^ t'es-tu coupd ? g f? s'est-il coupe ? * ?j nous sommes-nous coupes ?A >-< vous e tes-vous coupes .' < g se sout-ils coupes? " PLUPERFECT. M'etais-je coupe? t'etais-tu couple? s'etait-il coupe ? nous etions-nous coupes? vous etiez-vous coupes ? s'dtaient-ils coupes ? PRETERITE ANTERIOR. Me fus-je coupe ? te fus-tu coupe ? sc fut-il coupe ? nous fumes-nous coupes ? vous fiites-vous coupes? se furent-ils coupes? FUTURE ANTERIOR. Me serai-je coup^ ? te seras-tu coupe ? se sera-t-il coupe? nous serons-nous coupes ? vous serez-vous coupes ? se seront-ils coupes: 2 a 1 *? n ol CONDITIONAL PRESENT. Me couperais-je ? te couperais-tu ? se couperait-il ? nous couperions-nous ? vous coupcriez-vous ? BC couperaicnt-Us ? & 32 PAST. Me scrais-je coupe ? - ^ te serais-tu coup4 ? S. | se serait-il coui5 ? 3 nous serions-nous coupes?'* K( vous seriez-vous coupes ? ^ * se seraient-ils coupe's ? "* g 102 REFLECTED VERB. 180. REFLECTED VERB CONJUGATED INTERROGATIVELY AND NEGATIVELY. INDICATIVE. Simple Tenses. PRESENT. Ne mo flatte-je pas? Do I not flatter myself? ne te flattes-tu pas ? &c. dost thou not flatter thyself? fyc. IMPERFECT. Ne me flattais-je pas? &c. Was I not flattering myself? Ac. PRETERITE DEFINITE. Ne me flattai-je pas ? &c. Did I not flatter myself? nous employons, vous employez, ils emploient. Imp. J'ernployais, tu employais, il employait ; nous employions, vous employiez, ils employaient. Pret. J'employai, tu employas, il employa ; nous employames, vous employates, ils employment. Fut. J'emploierai, tu emploieras, il ernploiera ; nous emploierons, vous emploierez, ils emploieront. COND. J'emploierais, tu emploierais, il emploierait ; nous emploierions, vous emploicriez, ils emploieraient IMPEB. emploie, qu'il emploie ; employons, employez, qu'ils emploient SUBJ. ) j'emploie, tu emploies, il emploie ; Pres. j ^iious employions, vous employiez, ils emploient. Imp. gj'employasse, tu employasses, ilemployat; O'nous employ assions, vous employassiez, ils employas- sent. CONJUGATION OF VERBS ENDING IN i'KU. \ ] 5 205. Conjugate in the same manner verbs in yer, and iu general all those whose Present Participle ends in yant; as : Balayer, to sweep. efiruver, tofrighten. essaycr, to try. payer, to pay. nettoyer, to clean. appuyer, to prop; to rest upon. essuyer, to wipe. enmiyer, to tire. 206. Envoyer, to send ; and renvoyer, to send back, deviate from the preceding model of conjugation in the Future and Conditional, making J'enverrai,fenverrais ; je renverrai, je renverrais, instead of j'envoierai, &c. 207. REMARK. In the preceding verbs, the y is pre- served in every part of the verb, except before the mute terminations c, es, ent, where it is changed into i; Je paie* tu nettoies, Us appuient. Moreover, these verbs take a y and an i in the two first persons plural of the Imperfect of the Indicative and Present of the Subjunc- tive ; that is, the y of the radical part (as employ], and the i of the final part ions, iez. EXERCISE LXXVI. That throws me into a great dilemma. He threw himself dans embarras m. into the midst of the enemy. Have you sealed your paierai, or even >e pairm; but the liest modern Grammarians are agreed on the change of the y into i, ami present usage is conformable to their opinion. 116 CONJUGATION OF VERBS ENDING IN IEE. 208. VIII. MODEL FOR THE CONJUGATION VERBS ENDING IN IEE. PRIER, TO PRAY, TO REQUEST. OF Part. Pres. priant. Part. Past, prie". IND. \ Je prie, tu pries, il prie ; Pres. ) nous prions, vous priez, ils prient Imp. Je priais, tu priais, 51 priai t ; nous priions, vous priiez, ils priaient. fret. Je priai, tu prias, ilpria; nous priames, vous priates, ils prierent. Fut. Je prierai, tu prieras, il priera ; nous prierons, vous prierez, ils prieront. COND. Je prierais, tu prierais, il prierait ; nous prierions, vous prieriez, ils prieraient. IMTER. prie, qu'il prie ; prions, priez, qu'ils prient. SUBJ. ) g je prie, tu pries, il prie ; Pres. JQ'nous priions, vous priiez, ils prient. Imp. g je priasse, tu priasses, il priat ; O'uous priassions, vous priassiez, ils priassent. 209. Conjugate in the same manner all verbs ending in ier ; as, Certifier, to certify. nier, to deny. crier, to cry. oublier, to forget. e"tudier, to study. plier, to bmd. Her, to tie. relier, to bind. manier, to handle. remercier, to thank. REMARK. Frier and all verbs whose Present Parti- ciple ends in iant, take ii in the first and the second person plural of the Imperfect of the Indicative and Pre- sent of the Subjunctive ; that is, the i of the radical part (as pri], and the i of the termination : Nous priions, vous priiez ; que nous liions, que vous liiez. EXERCISE LXXV1I. I thank you for the honour you do me. He studies de que faites night and day. The plank was bending under him. planche f. sous EXERCISE ON VEKHS EXDIXG IX fJSK. lit 1 shall never forget (wlint I owe you). Request him to ce queje vous 'dois. de come and (speak to me). One (does not become) learned * me parler. On ne devient pas without studying. In handling that vase, he broke it. sans inf-1 m. briser ind-4 OF IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 210. However irregular a verb may be, its irregula- rities never occur in the compound tenses, for which reason we shall, except in a very few instances, dispense with these tenses in the various conjugations of irregular verbs. I. IRREGULAR VERBS OF TIIE FIRST CONJUGATION. The only irregular verbs of this conjugation are aller, to go; s'en aller, to go away; envoy cr, to send ; and renvoyer, to send back. 211. ALLER, TO GO. Part. Pres. allnnt. Part. Past, allc". FNT>. ) Je vais, 1 'res. j nous allons, tu vas, vous allez, il ra; Us vont. Imp. J'allais nous allii ins tu allais, vous alliez, il allait ; ils allaient. Fret. J'allai, nous allumes, tu alias, TOUS allates, jlalla; ils allerent. Fut. J'irai, nous irons, tu iras, vous irez, il ira ; ils iront. COXD. 1 J'irain, 1'res. j nous irions, tu irais, vous iriez, il irait ; ils iraient. IMPER. allons, va, allez, qu'il aille; qu'ils aillent. SUBJ. \ gj'aiUe, I'rcs. j o"nous allions, tu ailles, vous alliez, il aille ; ils aillent. Imp. Sj'allasso, O'nous allassions, tu allasses, vous allassicz, il allat ; ils allassent 118 CONJUGATION Of THE VERB S'JM ALLER. 212. REMARKS. Aller is conjugated with tlic auxil- iary etre, in all its compound tenses ; Je suis alle, fe'tats alle', &c. The Imperative va takes an s, when followed by en or y ; as, vas en savoir des nouvelles; vas-y. We sometimes say, je fus, f ai e'te, favais e'te', f aurais e'te', instead of j'allai, je suis alle', j'e'tais alle', je serais alle. These expressions, however, have this difference, that avoir e'te implies the return, and etre alle does not. Thus : il a e'te' a Rome, means, that he went to Rome, and is returned, or that he has been in Rome, and has left it ; but il est alle a Rome means only, that he is gone to Rome. (AcAD.) 213. S'EN ALLER, TO GO AWAY. INFINITIVE. PRESENT. PAST. S'en aller, to go away. \ S'en etre alle, to have gone away. PARTICIPLE PRESENT. COMP. OF PARTICIPLE PRESENT. S'en allant, going away. \ S'en e*tant alle", having gone away PARTICIPLE PAST. En alle, gone away. INDICATIVE. Simple Tenses. PRESENT. Je m'en vais, tu t'en vas, il s'en va, nous nous en allons, | vous vous en allez, ils s'en voiit, IMPERFECT. Je m'en allais, tu t'en allais, il s'en allait, nous nous en allions, il s'en est alle, nous nous en sommes alles, < ^ vous vous en etes alles, ils s'en sont alle's, PLUPERFECT. Je m'en etais alle, ^ tu t'en dtais alle, s* il s'en etait alle\ 1 |, nous nous en etions alles, ^ 35 vous vous en dtiez alles, ils s'en etaient allds, PRETERITE ANTERIOR. Je m'en fus alle", K tu t'en fus alle", . il s'en fut allo, nous nous en fumes alles, < -^ vous vous en futes alles, 2 ils s'en furent allds, ** CONJUGATION OF THE VERB S'A T ALLI-il. 119 Simple Tenses. Compound Temcs. FUTURE ABSOLUTE FUTURE ANTERIOR. Je m'cn irai, s Je m'en serai alle, ^ ^ tu t'en iras, 55 GO tu t'en seras alle, 1 * il s'en ira, II il s'en sera alle, 5S !>4 S limn nous en irons, ?s; S3 nous nous en scrons alle*s, e S: vous vous en irez, 3 vous vous en serez alles, If ils s'en iront, O ils s'en scront alies, c CONDITIONAL. PRESENT. M PAST. Je m'en irais, i *** Je m'en serais alle, *- tu t'en irais. tu t'en serais alle, ^ V) il s'en irait, a"l il s'en serait alle, 8 | nous nous en irions, o ~ c a. nous nous en serious alles, S yous vous en iriez, S 5 o vous vous en seriez alles, p a 4 ils s'en indent, ils s'en seraient aUe"s, IMPERATIVE. Affirmatively. Negatively. Vu-t'en, (in'il s'en aille, allons-nous-en, a o"* If Ne t'en va pas, qu'il ne s'en aille pas, ne nous en allons pas, ^ | | allez-vous-en, qu'ils s'en aillent, \~/ ne vous en allcz pas, qu'ils ne s'en aillent pas, o SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. Que je m'en aille, ^ que tu t'en ailles, ' {? qu'il s'en aille, a ** que nous nous en allions, | ^ que vous vous en alliez, ^ | qu'ils s'en aillent, <*: IMPERFECT. Que je m'en allasse, t^ que tu t'en allasses, " 6 qu'il s'en allat, o ^ que nous nous en allassions, 3 ^ que vous vous en allassiez, H= s. qu'ils s'en allassent, 5- PRETERITE. Que je m'en sois alle, que tu t'en sois alle, qu'il s'en soit alle, e nous nous en soyons s yous vous en sovez ^ils s'en soient PLUPERFECT. Que je m'en fusse alle, que tu t'en fusses alle, qu'il s'en fut alle", nous nous en fussions Svous vous en fussiez qu'ils s'en fussent ^a a K, *^ a 3 tfi tS " 5 ^ ^ 8. 2 i^ s; ^ 214. When S'en aller is used interrogatively, we say, M'en irai-je, t'en iras-tu, s'en ira-t-il, nous en irons-nous, vous en irez-vous, s'en iront-ils ? 120 IRREGULAR AXD DEFECTIVE VERBS. 215, Envoyer, to send, and renvoyer, to send back, (o dismiss, are regular, except in the Future and the Con- ditional, which, as we have already said (p. 115), make fenverrai, fenverrais ; je renverrai, je rerwerrais. EXERCISE LXXVIIL I am going to pay some visits. He goes from town to town. * faire visile f. en They are going to the country. Blue and pink go campagnef. art.bleum. art. rose m. well tog-ether. We went by land. She is gone to church. terre. art. eglisef. Let us go away from here. Why do you go away so soon ? Pourquoi tot I will send my servant to the post-office. She would domestique m. poste f. dismissheT chambermaid. They would send back their horses. fcmme de chambre. 216. II. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. AUSTEXIR (S'), to abstain, is conjugated like Tenir, which is exemplified farther on. ACCOURIR, to run to, is conjugated like Courir, with this difference, that its compound tenses are sometimes formed with avoir, and sometimes with etre, according as it denotes state or action. (See No. 172.) ACCUEILUR, to receive; see Cueillir. 217. ACQUERIR, TO ACQUIRE. Part. Pres. acque"rant. fart. Past, acquis. IND. 1 2'res. f Imp. Tret. Put. J'acquiers, nous acque"rons, J'acquerais, nous acquerions, J'acquis, nous acquimes, J'acqnerrai, nous acquerrons, tu acquiers, vous acquerez, tu acque"rais, vous acqu^riez, tu acquis, vous acqultes, tu acquerras, vous acquerrez, il acquiert ; ils acquierent. il acquiSrait ; ils acqudraient, il acquit ; ils acquirent. il acquerra ; ils acquerrout. IRREGl'LAU AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 121 'oxn. ) Vcs. j tu acquerrais. il acquerrait ; vous acquerriez, ils acquerraient. acquiers, qu'il acquiere ; , acqudrez, qu'ils acquierent. tu acquieres, il acquiere ; vous acqueriez, ils acquierent. tu acquisses, il acquit ; vous acquisdez, ils acquissent. 218. Conjugate in the same manner: ( seldom used but in the infinitive, the pre- Conqucrir, to conquer A terite definite, the imperfect of the sub- ( junctive, and the compound tenses. J'acquerrais, nous acquerrions, IMTER. acque"rons, St'BJ. \ gj'acquiere, Prcs. J CMIOUS acque*rions, Imp. gj'acquisse, C'nous acqui.ssions, Qucrir, to fetcli, is used after the verbs alter, venir, tn- voyer ; as, allez querir, go and fetch; envoycz querir, send for. It is confined to familiar conversation, and is getting obsolete. (Querir is better than Querir.} 219. ASSAILLIR, TO ASSAULT. Part. Prcs. assaillant. Part. Past, assailli. IXD. 1 J'assaille, tu assaillcs, il assaille ; I'rcs. j nous assaillons, vous assaillez, ils assaillent. Imp. J'assaillais, tu assaillais, 51 assaillait ; nous assaillions, vous assailliez, ils assaillaient. Pret. J'assaillis, tu assaillis, il assaillit ; nous assaillimes, vous assaillites, ils assaillirent. Fut. J'assaillirai, tu assailliras, il assaillira ; nous assaillirons, vous assaillircz, ils assailliront. COXD. ") J'assaillirais, tu assaillirais, il assaillirait; Pres. ) nous assaillirions, vous assailliriez, Us assailliraieut l.Mi'i:u. assaille, qu'il assaille ; assaillons, assaillez, qu'ils assaillent. SUBJ. ) Sj'assaille, Pres. j o" nous assaillions, tu assaille*. vous assailliez, il assaille; ils assaillent. Imp. ^.j'assaillisse. tu assaillis.sc9, il assaillit; 122 IRREGULAR AS'D DEFECTIVE VERBS Conjugate in the same manner tressaillir, to start. Note. J. J. Rousseau, and other writers, have. for the sake of euphony, written In the present of the Indicative, il tressafllit, instead of il Iressaille. lie had acquired tine lie would acquire EXERCISE LXXIX. great influence over his contemporaries. 32 f. sur honour honneur m. h m. contemporain in. and reputation. 32 reputation f. Asia. A conquered Alexander conquered a great part, of ind-3 partief. art. province. We were overtaken by a furious storm. At 1 f. ind-3 assaillir d' tempctcf. every word they said to him about his son, the good chaque qu' on disait * de old man leaped for joy. She started with fear. vieillard tressaillir ind-2 de joie. ind-3 de peur. 220. BENIR, to bless, is conjugated \\kefinir (see p. 73), and is only irregular in its past participle, which makes benit, benite; and beni, be'nie. Benit, benite, is used only in speaking of things con- secrated by a religious ceremony ; as, du pain be'nit, consecrated bread ; de I'eau benite, holy water. 221. BOUILLIR, TO BOIL. Part. Prcs. bouillant. Part. Past, bouilli. INT). > Pres. \ Jc bous, nous bouillons, tu bous, vous bouillez, il bout ; ils bouillent. Imp. Je bouillais, nous bouillions, tu bouillais, vous bouilliez, il bouillait ; ils bouillaient. Fret. Je bouillis, nous bouillimcs, tu bouillis, vous bouillites, il bouillit ; ils bouillirent. Fut. Je bouilh'rai, nous bouillirons, tu bouilliras, vous bouillirez, il bouillira ; ils bouilliront. COND. ) Pres. j Je bouillirais, nous bouUlirions, tu bouillirais, vous bouilliriez, il bouillirait ; ils bouilliraient. IMPEII. bouillons, bous, bouillez. qu'il bouille ; qu'ils bouillent. OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 123 SITBJ. \ gje bouille, tu bouilles, ilbouille; Ites. j" O'nous bouulions, vous bouillicz, ils bouillent. Imp. g je bouillisse, tu bouillisses, il bouillit ; O'nous bouillissions, vous bouillissicz, ils bouillissent. This verb is seldom used in French, except in the third persons singular and plural ; as, L'eau bout, the water boils ; ces choux ne bouillaient pas, these cabbages did not boil. But when to boil has a noun or pronoun for its object, the French then make use of the different tenses of the verb faire before the infinitive boidllir ; as, Je fats bouillir, nous faisons bouillir, &c. Therefore say, Je fais bouillir de la viande, I boil some meat, and not je bous. Rebouillir, to boil again, is conjugated in the same manner, and follows the same rules. Ebouillir, to boil away, is seldom used but in the In- finitive and past participle ibouilli, m ; cbouillie, f. 222. COURIR, TO RUN. Part. Pres. courant. Part. Past, couru. IXD. | Je cours, 1'rcs. } nous courons, Imp. Je courais, nous courions, Pret. Je courus, nous courumes, Fut. Je courrai, nous courroiis, COND. ) Je courrais, Pres. \ nous courrions, IMPEU. courons, SUBJ. ) g je coure, ' '/- .?. \ O'nous courions, Imp. sje courusse, tu cours, il court ; vous courez, ils courent. tu courais, il courait ; vous couriez, ils couraient. tu courus, il courut ; vous courutes, ils coururent. tu courras, il courra ; vous courrcz, ils courront. tu courrais ; il courrai t ; vous courriez, ils courraieut. cours, qu'il coure ; courez, qu'ils courent. tu coures, il coure ; vous couriez, ils courent. tu courusses, il courut ; vous courussiez, ils courussent 223. Conjugate in the same manner: Accourir, concourir, discourir, to run to. to concur, to discourse. cncounr, parcourir, secourir. to incur, to run over to succour 1 24 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS EXERCISE LXXX. God had blessed the race of Abraham Docs the water boil? We were boiling some potatoes. Boil that pommes de tcrre. meat again, it is not (done enough). You run faster ciande f. " assez cuite. plus vite than I. Will men always run after shadows? moi. art. 32 chimere f. pi. Socrates passed the last day of his life in discoursing passer a inf-1 on the immortality of the soul. You would incur the immortalite displeasure of the prince. I have run over the whole town disgrace f. 21 to find him This sauce has ^boiled away Hoo much pour trouver 87 - f. est f. trop COUVRIR, to cover ; see Ouvrir. 224. CUEILLIR, TO GATHER. Part. Pres. cueillant. Part. Past, cueilli. IXD. ) Je cueille, tu cueilles, il cueille ; Pres. \ nous cueillons, vous cueillez, ils cueillent. Imp. Je cueillais, tu cueillais, il cueillait ; nous cueillions, vous cucilliez, ils cueillaient. Pret. Je cueillis, tu cueillis, il cueillit ; nous cueillimes, vous cueillites, ils cueillirent. Fut. Je cueillerai, tu cueilleras, il cueillera ; nous cueillerons, vous cueillerez, ils cuerilleront. COXD. ") Je cueillerais, tu cueillerais, il cueillerait ; Pres. ) nous cueillerions, vous cueillericz, ils cueilleraient, I.MPER. cueille, qu'il cueille ; cueillons, cueillez, qu'ils cueillent. SUBJ. ]_ gje cueille, tu cueilles, il cueille ; Pres. JO" nous cueillions, vous cueilliez, ils cueillent. Imp. 2 je cueillisse, tu cueillisses, il cueillit ; 225. Conjugate in the same manner : Accucillir, to receive, to welcome \ recueillir, to collect. OF TilK SECOND CONJUGATION. 125 226. DORHIIt, TO SLEEP. IND. I I'res. j Imp. fret. Fut. COND. ) fres. j Part. Pns. dormant. Je dors, nous dormons, Je dormais, nous dormions, Je dormis, nous dormimes, Je dormirai, nous dormirous, Je dormirais, uous dominions, Part. Pest, dormi. LMPEU. dormons, SUBJ. \ Sje dorme, Pres. j C'nous dormious, Imp. S: je dormisse, C'uous dorniiasious, tti dors, il dort ; vous dormez, ils dorment tu dormais, il dormait ; vous dormiez, ils dormaient. tu dormis, il dormit ; YOUS doruiites, ils dormirent. tu dormiras, il dormira ; vous dormii-ez, ils dormirout. tu dormii-ais, il dormirait ; vous dormiriez, ils dormiruient dors, qu'il dorme ; dormez, qu'ils dorment. tu dormes, il dorme ; YOUS dormiez, ils dormeut. tu dormisses, il dormit ; voud dormiasiez, ils dormiaseiit. 227. Conjugate in the same manner: Endorinir, b'eiidorinir, to lull asleep, to fail asleep. se reudormir, to fall asleep again. 228. FAILLIR, to fail. This verb is used only in the presentof the Infinitive; in the Participle past/cuV/ty in the Preterite definite, je faillis, tu faillis, Uj'aiUit; nous faillimes, vous faillites, ils faillirent ; and in the compound tenses, faifailli,favais failli, &c. Its derivative defaillir, to faint, to fail, is scarcely ever used but in the first and third persons plural of the pre- sent of the Indicative, nous dtfaillons, ils defaillent ; in the Imperfect, je defaillais, &c. ; in the Preterite definite, je de/'aillis, &c. ; in the Preterite indefinite, fai de/'ailli, Je hais, J*res. J nous haissons, tu hais, vous haissez, il liait ; ils haisseut. Imp. Je haTssais, nous haissions, tu haTssais, vous haissiez, il haissait ; ils halssaient. Pret. Je hais, nous haimes, tu hais, vous haites, il halt; ils ha'irent. Fut. Je halrai, nous halrons, tu halras, vous hairez, il haira ; ils hairont. COND. \ Je hairais, Pres. j nous hairions, tu hairais, vous halriez, il hairait ; ils halraient. IMPER. haissons, hais, haissez, qu'il haisse ; qu'ils haissent. SUBJ. ) gje haisse, Pres. JO'nous haissions, tu haisses, vous haissiez, il haisse ; ils haissent. Imp. je halsse, O'nous haissions, tu haisses, vous haissiez, il halt ; ils haissent. 234. REMARKS. The h is aspirated in this verb, and a diaeresis () is placed over the i, throughout all the tenses, to show that it is to be pronounced separately from the preceding vowel a; as, ha-'i; except, however, the three persons singular of the present of the Indicative, and the second person singular of the Imperative, which, forming only one syllable, are written without the diaeresis, thus : Je hais, tu hais, il halt hats, and pronounced Je he, tu he, il he ; he. This verb is seldom used in the second person singular of the Imperative, the Preterite definite, or the Imperfect of the Subjunctive, and in these two last tenses, instead of making use of the circumflex accent : nous haimes, 128 IIlIiEGULAll AND DEFECTIVE VERBS vous haites ; qu'il halt, we use the diaeresis, nous haimes, vous haites ; qu'il halt. MENTIS, to lie, to utter falsehood, is conjugated like sentir. 235. MOURIR, TO DIE. Part. Pres. mouraut. Part. Past, mort. IND. \ Je meurs, tu meurs, il meurt; .ZVeJ. j nous mourons, vous mourez, ils meurent. Imp. Je mourais, tu mourais, il mourait ; nous mourions, vous mouriez, ils mouraient. Pret. Je mourus, tu mourus, il mourut ; nous mourumes, vous mourutes, ils moururent. Fut. Je mourrai, tu mourras, il mourra ; nous mourrons, vous mourrez, ils mourront. COND. > Je mourrais, tu mourrais, il mourrait ; Pres. J nous mourrious, vous mourriez, ils mourraient. IMPEII. meurs, qu'il meure ; mourons, mourez, qu'ils meurent SUBJ. \ je meure, tu meures, il meure ; Pres. j O"nous mourions, vous mouriez, ils meurent. Imp. gje mourusse, tu mourusses, il mourut ; <3?nous mourussions, vous mourussiez, ils mourussent. Mourir is conjugated with the auxiliary elre in its compound tenses. The double r of the Future and Conditional must be sounded strongly. When this verb takes the reflected form, se mourir, it means to be at the point of death ; but, in this sense, it is seldom used except in the present and imperfect of the Indicative. (AcAD.) 236. OUIR, to hear. (Active and defective verb.) Part, past, GUI'. IND. pret. j'oui's, tu oui's, &c. SUBJ. imperf. quo j'oui'sse, qu tu ou'isses, qu'il oui't, &c. This verb is chiefly used in the compound tenses, which are generally followed by another verb in the infinitive ; as, Je 1'ai om precher (AcAD.) Je 1'avais oui dire. Uiave heard Mm preach. I had heard it said. OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 129 EXERCISE LXXXII. (Let us make haste), timeflies I cannot meet him, Hdtons-nous art. nepuis rencontrer he shuns me. I hate falsehood. Let us hate vice. art. mensonge m. art. m. He died some time after. John Calvin, the celebrated 127 celebre reformer, died at Geneva, on the 27th May 1564. He reformateur * is dying. All the witnesses have been heard. Anger se mourir temoin m. art. colere f. soon dies in a kind heart. Here lies an honest man. *promptement 1 bon honnete 237. OUVRIR, TO OPEN. Part. Pr. ) Je sers, tu sers, il sert ; Pres. j" nous servons, vous servez, ils servent. Imp. Je servais, tu servais, il servait ; nous servions, vous serviez, ils servaient Pret. Je servis, tu servis, il servit ; nous servimes, vous servites, ils servirent. Fut . Je servirai, tu serviras, il servira ; nous servirons, vous servirez, ils serviront. COND. \ Je servirais, tu servirais, il servirait ; Pres. ) nous servirions, vous serviriez, ils sei-viraient. IMPEB. sers, qu'il serve ; servons, servez, qu'ils servent. SUBJ. > je sarve, Pres. j O"nous servions, tu serves, il serve ; vous serviez, ils servent. Imp. je servisse, tu servisses, il servit ; cmous servisaions, vous servissiez, ils servissent. 244. Conjugate in the same manner, desservir, to clear the table. Asservir, to enslave, to subject, is regular, and conju- gated like^m'r. 132 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERB3 EXERCISE LXXXIV. He who serves well his country (has no need) of ancestors. n'a pas besoin 40 You will feel the effects of it. Smell this rose. Shall we effetin. 108 f . consent to that bargain? Never (tell a falsehood). I foresaw marchem. mentir all those misfortunes. He repents of his bad conduct. malheur m. mauvais conduite f lie serves his friends with warmth. Help the gentleman chaleur. s d * ^monsieur to some partridge. Shall I have the honour to help you to 1 ^ de a wing of a chicken ? dear the table. aile f. * 2-45. SORTIE, TO GO OUT, TO COME OUT. Part. Pres. sortant. Part. Past, sorti. IND. \ Je sors, Pres. j" nous sortons, tu sol's, vous sortez, il sort ; ils sortent. Imp. Je sortais, nous sortions, tu sortais, vous sortiez, il sortait ; ils sortaient. Pret. Je sortis, nous sortimes, tu sortis, vous sortites, il sortit ; ils sortirent. Put. Je sortirai, nous sortirons, tu sortiras, vous sortirez, il sortira ; ils sortiront. COND. \ Je sortirais, Pres. j nous sortirions, tu sortirais, vous sortiriez, il sortirait ; ils sortiraient. IMPER. sortons, sors, sortez, qu'il sorte ; qu'ils sortent. SUBJ. \ gje sorte, Pres. j"c?iious sortions, tu sortes, vous sortiez, il sorte ; ils sortent. Imp. 2je sortisse, O'nous sortissions, tu sortisses, vous sortissiez, il sortit ; ils sortissent. 246. Conjugate in the same manner, ressortir, to go out again. OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 133 EXERCISE LXXXV. I go out every morning 1 before breakfast. The tout art. matinia.pl. avant fox comes out of his hole. We went out of the town rcnardm. terrier m. after him. Everybody is gone out. I shall go out in half apres Tout le ntonde aa hour If I were as ill as you, I would not go out. malade Do not go out to-day. He (is just) gone out. He iccnt aujourd hui. vicnt de iuf-1 out again immediately. I will not go out again this evening. sur-le-champ. soir m. 247. TENIR, TO HOLD, TO KEEP. Part. Pres. tenant. Part. Past, tenu. IKD. 1 Je tiens, Pres. > nous tenons, tu tiens, vous tenez, il tient ; ils tieuuent. Imp. Je tenais, noua teuions, tu tenais, vous teniez, il tenait ; ils teuaient. Pret. Je tins, nous tinmes, tu tins, vous tiutes, il tint ; ils tinrent. Put. Je tiendrai, nous tieudrons, tu tiendras, vous tiendrez, il tiendra ; Us tiendront. COND. ) Je tiendrais, Pres. j" nous tiendrions, tu tiendrais, vous tieudriez, il tiendrait ; ils tieudraieut. bll'ERF. tenons, tiens, tenez, qu'il tienne ; qu'ils tiennent. Sciu. ) 2je tienne, Pres. j" 5*110113 tenions, tu tiennes, vous teniez, il tienne ; ils tiennent. Imp. je tinsse, C'lious tinssious, tu tinsses, vous tinssiez, il tint ; ils tinssent. 248. Conjugate in the same manner : S'abstenir, to abstain. appartenir, to belong. contenir, to contain, [verse. eutretenir, to keep up ; to con- maintenir, to maintain. obtenir, to obtain, \retain. retenir, to get hold again; to soutenir, to sustain. Observe that in these verbs the n is doubled, whenever it is followed by mute ; but in no other case. 131 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS EXERCISE LXXXVI. I hold it fast, it shall not escape from me Liberality bien echapper * art. holds a medium between prodigality and avarice. le milieu m. entre art. art. f. This garden is well kept He abstained from drinking on jar din m. boire * that day. These horses belong to our general England ce jour-la. art. and the principality of Wales contain fifty-two counties. principaute f. Galles comte m. They conversed about trifles. I shall maintain it s' de bagatelles. everywhere. Do not maintain so absurd an opinion. Has partout. 2 si s absurde 1 f. he obtained permission ? Detain not the wages of a f. retenir gages m. pi. servant. That column supports all the building. domestiquem. colonnef. soutenir bdtimentm. 249. VENIR, TO COME. Part. Pres. venant. Part . Past, venti. IND. ) Je viens, Pres. \ nous venons, tu viens, vous venez, il vient ; ils viennent. Imp. Je venais, nous venions, tu venais, vous veniez, il venait ; ils venaient. Fret. Je vins, nous vinmes, tu vins, vous vintes, il vint ; ils vinrent. Put. Je viendrai, nous vieudrons, tu viendras, vous viendrez, il viendra ; ils viendront. COND. ) Je viendrais, Pres. } nous viendrions, tu viendrais, vous viendriez, il vieudrait ; ils viendraient. IMTER. venons, viens, venez, qu'il vienne ; qu'ils viennent. SUBJ. ) je vienne, Pres. ) O'nous venions, tu viennes, vous veniez, il vienne ; ils viennent. Imp. gje viusse, O'nous vinssions, tu vinsses, vous vinssiez, il vint ; ils vinssent. 250. Venir is conjugated like tenir; but with this Of T11E SECOND CONJUGATION. 135 difference, that in its compound tenses it always takes the auxiliary etre. Convenir, devenir, 251. Conjugate in the same manner :- to agree; to suit, to become. disconvenir, to deny, [terfere. to intervene; to in- prevenir, to anticipate ; topre- se ressouvenir, to recolkct. \vent. revenir, to come back. to remember. to relieve. se souvenir, subvenir, intervemr, parvenir, to attain. 252. Pre'vcnir and Subvenir are conjugated in their compound tenses with the auxiliary avoir. Convenir, when it signifies to agree, takes etre; but avoir, when it signifies to suit. 253. VETIR, TO CLOTHE. Part. Pres. vetant. Part. Past, vetu. IND. "1 Je vets, Pres. ) nous vetons, tu vets, vous vetez, il vet ; ils vetent. Imp. Je vetais, nous vetions, tu vetais, vous vetiez, il vetait; ils vetaient. Pret. Je vetis, nous retimes, tu vetis, vous vetites, il vetit ; ils vetirent. Fut. Je vetirai, nous vetirons, tu vetiras, . vous vetirez, il vetira ; ils vetiront. > Je vetirais, Pres. j nous vetirions, tu vetirais, vous vetiriez, il vetirait ; ils vetiraient. IMPER. vetons, vets, vetez, qu'il Tete ; qu'ils vetent. SUBJ. ) je vete, Pres. j C'nous vetious, tu vetes, vous vetiez, il vete ; ils vetent. Imp. 2je vetisse, C'nous vetissions, tu vetisses, vous vetissiez, il vetit ; ils vetissent. 254. Vvtir, in the singular of the Present of the Indi- cative, and in the singular of the Imperative, is seldom used. It is most frequently reflected, and then it signi- fies to dress oneself. In this sense it is conjugated in its compound tenses, like all other pronominal verbs, with the auxiliary etre : Je me suis vetu ; nous nous SOMMES vetue. Conjugate in the same manner : Ddvetir, to divest, to strip. \ Revfitir, to clothe, to invest. 136 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS EXERCISE LXXXVII. I come from London You come very seasonably. He fort d propos. came on foot. Come on Saturday morning, at ten o'clock. He ind-4 a pied. * heures. will come back before the end of this month. We have agreed finf. mois m. about the conditions That she might become more prudent. de f. Do you deny the fact? He will not interfere with that de fait m. dans affair. We shall attain our end. Remember your affaire f. d but m. de promises. They have relieved all his wants. He only promessef. On 111 d besoinm, ne passed for a traveller, but lately he has assumed the ind-2 que voyageur depuis peu rev&ir character of an envoy. He dressed himself m haste. caracterem. * envoy em. a art. hdtef. h a. 255. III. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 256. ASSEOIR, to set, is an active verb ; but it is prin- cipally used as a reflected verb, and is conjugated as follows : S'ASSEOIR, TO SEAT ONESELF, TO SIT, TO SIT DOWN. Part. Prcs. s'asseyant. Part. Past, assis. IND. ) Je ni'assieds, tu t'assieds, il s'assied ; Pres. ) nous nous asseyons, vous vous asseyez, ils s'asseient. Imp. Je m'asseyais, tu t'asseyais, il s'asseyait ; nous nous assey ions, vous vous asseyiez, ils s'asseyaient. Pret. Je m'assis, tu t'assis, il s'assit ; nous nous assimes, vous vous assites, ils s'assirent. Fut. Je m'assierai. tu t'assieras, il s'assi^ra ; nous nous assierons, vous vous assie"rcz, ils s'assieront. O* THE TlItRD CONJUGATION. 1ST Je m'assierais, uous nous assit'riou.s, asseyons-nous, 2 je m'asseie, C* nous nous asseyions, COND. Pres. tu t'assie'rais, vous vous assie'riez, IMPERATIVE. assieds-toi, asseyez-vous, SUBJ. Pres. tu t'asseies, vous vous asseyicz, Imperfect. il s'assierait ; Us s'assieraient. qu'il s'asseie ; qu'ils s'asseient. il s'asseie ; ils s'asseient. 2 je m'assisse, tu t'assisses, il s'assit ; C" nous nous assissions, vous vous assissiez, ilss'assissent. Conjugate in the same manner, rasseoir, to set again, to sit down again, to calm. AVOIR, to have, is conjugated at length, p. 60. 257. CHOIR, to fall. This verb is not much used; it is sometimes employed in the Infinitive, especially in poetry, where it is a very expressive term, when well brought in. The Past Participle, chu, cliue, is also used, but rather in verse than in prose, and rather in the jocular and i'amiliar than in the serious and dignified style. DECHOIR, to decay, to fall off. Past participle, de'chu. This verb is seldom used in any other tense. 258. ECHOIR, to fall to ; to expire, to be due. Part, pres. e'cheant. Part, past, echu, e'chue. Indie, pres. il v'choit, sometimes pronounced, and even written, U e'chet. Pret. j'e'chus. Fut. j'e'cherrai. Cond. j'e'cherrais. Imperf. Subj. que fe'chusse. (AcAD.) FALLOIR, to be necessary, is a unipersonal verb, the conjugation of which has been given, page 105. EXERCISE LXXXVIII. Set the child in an arm-chair. Why do you not sit fauteuilm. Fourquoi down? He sat down under the shade of a tree. Shall a oyibre f. arbre m. we sit down here ' Let us sit down, my friends. Sit down 138 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS on this form. I (had risen) to go out, but he made me s ur bane m. m'etais leve pour *fit * sit down again He is much fallen in the esteem of the fort dechoir estimef. public This bill of exchange is due to-day. m. lettref. change aujourdhui. 259. MOUVOIR, TO MOVE. Part. Pres. mouvant. Part. Past, mu. IND. 1 Je meus, Pres. I nous mouvons, tu meus, vous mouvez, il meut ; ils meuvent. Imp. Je mouvais, nous mouvions, tu mouvais, vous mouviez, il mouvait ; ils mouvaient. Pret . Je mus, nous mumes, tu mus, vous mutes, il mut; ils murent. Put. Je mouvrai, nous mouvrons, tu mouvras, vouz mouvrez, il mouvra ; ils mouvront. COND. \ Je mouvrais, Pres. j nous mouvrions, tu mouvrais, vous mouvriez, il mouvrait ; ils mouvraient. IMPER. mouvons, meus, mouvez, qu'il meuve ; qu'ils meuvent. SUBJ. \ 2 je meuve, ' Pres. j O'nous mouvions, tu meuves, vous mouviez, il meuve ; ils meuvent Imp. gje musse, O'nous mussions, tu musses, vous mussiez, il mut ; ils mussent. 260. Conjugate in the same manner, e'mouvoir, to stir up, to move ; and promouvoir, to promote. This last verb is seldom used but in the Infinitive, and in the compound tenses. PLEUVOIR, to rain; see page 104. 261. POURVOIR, TO PROVIDE. Part. Pres. pourvoyant. Part. Past, pourvu. IND. \ Je pourvois, tu pourvois, il pourvoit ; Pres. f nous pourvoyons, vous pourvoyez, ils pourvoient. Imp. Je pourvoyais, tu pourvoyais, il pourvoyait ; nous pourvoyions, vous pourvoyiez, ils pourvoyaieut. OF THE TH1KD CONJUGATION. 139 COXD Pres Pret. Je pourvus, tu pourvus, il pourvut ; nous pourvumes, voua pourvutes, ils pourvurent. Fut. Je pourvoirai, tu pourvoiras, ilpourvoira; nous pourvoirons, vous pourvoirez, ils pourvoiront. Je pourvoirais, tu pourvoirais, il pourvoirait ; nous pourvoirions, vous pourvoiriez, ils pourvoiraient. pourvois, qu'il pourvoie ; pourvoyons, pourvoyez, qu'ilspourvoient. SUBJ. I 2 je pourvoie, tu pourvoies, il pourvoie ; 1'rts. ) Q'uous pourvoyions, vous pourvoyiez, ils pourvoient. Imp. je pourvusse, tu pourvusses, il pourvut ; C'uous pourvussions, vous pourvussiez, ils pourvussent. XD. ) es. f hll'ER. 262. FOUVOIR, TO BE ABLE. Part. Pres. pouvant. Je puis, or je peux, tu peux, Pret. Fut. COXD. vous pouvez, tu pouvais, vous pouviez, tu pus, vous putes, tu pourras, voua pourrez, tu pourrais, vous pourriez, (To can. Walker.) Part. Past, pu. il peut ; ils peuvent. Pres. ) nous pouvons, Imp. Je pouvais, nous pouvions, Je pus, nous pumes, Je pourrai, nous pourrons, Je pourrais, nous pourrions, fA'o Imperative.} tu puisses, vous puissiez, tu pusses, vous pussiez, 263. REMARKS. In the Future and Conditional of this verb, one r only is pronounced, although written with two. In the Present of the Indicative, we say je puis or je peux ; however, je puis is much more used, and ought to be preferred, since interrogatively we always say puis-je ? Quels voeux puis-je former? (La Harpe.) Quejpuis-/e ajouter & cct cloge? (C. Delavigne.} SUBJ. \ gje puisse, Pres. ) odious puissions, Imp. gje pusse, O'nous pussions, il pouvait ; ils pouvaient. il put ; ils purent. il pourra ; ils pourront. il pourrait ; ils pourraient. il puisse ; ils puissent. il put ; ils pussent. 140 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS Moreover, je puis, and not j'e peux, is the expression employed in the writings of the best French authors. . . . Enfin je puts parler en liberte" ; Jepuis dans tout son jour mettre la ve'rite' (Racine.*) Je ne puis bien parler, et ne saurais me taire (Boileau.) Je ne puis songer Que cette horloge existe, et n'ait point d'horloger (Voltaire.) Je puis 6tre un serviteur inutile (J/osstV/on.) We say : je ne puis, and je ne puis pas. In the first phrase, the negative is less strong : Je ne puis implies difficulties. Je ne puis pas expresses impossibility. PREVALOIR, to prevail ; see Valoir. PROJIOUVOIR, to promote ; see Houvoir. 264. RAVOIR, to have again, to get again, is only used in the Present of the Infinitive. Figuratively, and familiarly, we say se ravoir, in the sense of to recover, to gather new strength : Aliens, monsieur, tachez un peu de vous ravoir. (/. /. Rousseau.} EXERCISE LXXXIX. The spring which moves the whole machine is very ressort m. mouvoir 2 1 f. ingenious ,IIe moved the heart of that unfeeling 1 man. emouvoir cccur m. ^insensible 1 He has been promoted to the dignity of chancellor. chancelier. He will provide for all your wants. I cannot answer you. a besoin m. Can I be useful to you ? Save himself who can Can you utile Sauve * lend me an umbrella ? I could not foresee that event. preter ind-2 prevoir evenement m. 1 shall never be able to persuade him. We would be able * persuader to go out. Try to get it again. * 245 Tdcher de OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. Ill 265. SA VOIR, TO KXOW. Part. Pres. sachant. Part. Past, su. I.VD. ) Je sais, Pres. ( noua savons, Imp. Je savais, nous savions, Pret. Je sus, nous sumes, Je saurai, nous saurons, Je saurais, Pres. \ nous saurions, Fut. tu sais, vous savez, il sait ; ils savent. tu savaia, vous saviez, il savait ; ils savaient. tu sus, vous sutes, il sut ; ils surent. tu sauras, vous saurcz, il saura ; ils sauront. tu saurais, vous sauriez, il saurait; ils sauraient. sache, sachez, qu'il sache ; qu'ils sachent. tu saches, vous sachiez, il sache ; ils sachent. tu susses, vous sussiez, il sut ; ils sussent. sachons, SITBJ. ) je sache, Pres. \ Q'noua sachions, Imp. Je susse, nous suasions, fi'ott. We find satoir written tfaroir in some old and esteemed work* ; but now, the French Academy, and all the modern Grammarians, suppress the letter ( as useless, because It does not affect the pronunciation of the word, nor does it even serve to point out its Latin derivation, since all the best French etymologists derive tatoir from tapere, and not from tcire. 266. We sometimes employ the Subjunctive of tavoir instead of the Indicative, but never without a negative ; as, JE NE SACHE rien de plus digne d'e'loge, I know- nothing more praiseworthy. 267. Jene saurais is often used for^e nepuis (I cannot) ; yet we do not say, je ne saurais for je ne pourrais, nor je saurais for je puis. 268. The student must not confound savoir with connaitre, which also signifies to know. We do not say tavoir quclipjCun, but connaUre qitelqu'un, to know, or be acquainted with some one. 269. SEOIR, to become, to lefit, is never used in the present of the Infinitive. It has only the participle 142 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS present seyant, and the third persons of some of the simple tenses : il sied, Us sie'ent ; il seyait, ils seyaient ; il sie'ra, ils sieront ; il sierait, ils sie'raient ; qu'il sie'e, qu'ils sie'ent. 270. When seoir signifies to sit, it has only the two Participles, scant and sis, which last is used in law as an adjective, and generally translated into English by situate or situated. SURSEOIR, to suspend, to put off ; see No. 275. EXERCISE XC. I know that he is not your friend, but I know likewise de pi. atwst that he is a man of probity The wise man knows how to * bien. sage * * * regulate his taste, his labours, and his pleasures. Do you regler gout pi. travail know French ? They do not know then: lessons. Milton art. lefon knew Homer almost by heart. I shall know well how to Homere presque coeur. * * (defend myself) (In order) that you may know it. The me defendre. Afin head-dress which that lady wore became her very well coiffure f. que porter ind-2 ind-2 lui Colours that are too gaudy will not become you. art. couleurf. * * voyant 271. VALOIR, TO BE WORTH. Part. Pres. valant. Part. Past, valu. IND. ) Pres. j Je vaux, nous valons, tu vaux, vous valez, il vaut ; ils valent. Imp. Je valais, nous valions, tu valais, vous valiez, il valait ; ils valaient. Pret. Je valus, nous valumes, tu valus, vous valutes, il valut ; ils valurent. Put. Je vaudrai, nous vaudrons, tu vaudras, vous vaudrez, il vaudra ; ils vaudront. COND. 1 Pres. ] Jc vaudrais, nous vaudrions, tu vaudrais, vous vaudriez, il vaudrait ; ils Yiuulmient, OF TDK THIRD CONJUGATION. 143 IVIPEB. vaux, qu'il vaille ; ralona, valez, qu'ils vailleut. SUBJ. \ gje vaille, tu vaillea, il vaille ; Pres. j ctaous valions, voua valiez, ila vailleut. Imp. je valusse, tu valusses, il valut ; O'nous valussions, voas valussiez, ils valusaent. In the compound tenses, valoir takes the auxiliary avoir. Conjugate in the same manner : Equivaloir, to be equivalent. \ revaloir, to return like for like. 272. Prevalotr, to prevail, follows the same conjuga- tion, excepting that in the Subjunctive Present it makes, que je prevale, que tu prevales, qu'il prevale ; que nous pre'ualions, que vous prevaliez, qu'ils prevalent ; and not, que je prevaille, que tu prevailles, etc. EXERCISE XCI. This cloth is worth twenty shillings a yard. Actions drapm. schelling F aune. art. effetm. are better tlian words. His horse was not worth teu valoir art. parole f. guineas. That victory procured him the staff of a marshal guinee victoiref. valoir lui baton m. *marechal of France. One ounce of gold is equivalent to fifteen ounces once f. or of silver. That answer will be equivalent to a refusal. argent. rponsef. refusra. Favour often prevails over merit. His advice- art. 2 1 sur art. merite m. avis m. prevailed. That consideration has prevailed over all consideration f. art others. Doubt not that truth will prevail at la t. douter art. * ne subj-1 a la longue 273. VOIR, TO SEE. Part. Pres. voyant. Part. Past, vu. INK. / Je vow, tu vois, il voit ; Pres. \ nous voyons, voua voyez, .icnt. Imp. Je voyais, tu v. ilvoyait; nousvoy vous vovicz, i!-> 1-14 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS 2'ret. Je vis, tu vis, il vit ; nous vimes, vous vites, ils virent. Put. Je verrai, tu verras, il verra ; nous verrons, vous verrez, ils verront. COXD. \ Je verrais, tu verrais, il verrait ; Pres. y nous verrions, vous verriez, ils verraient. IXPJEB. vois, qu'il voie ; royons, voyez, qu'ils voient. SUBJ. ") je voie, tu voies, il voie ; /Ves. J C*uous voyions, vous voyiez, ils voient. Imp. je visse, tu visses, il vlt ; C'nous vissions, vous vissiez, ils vissent. 274. Conjugate in the same manner, entrevoir, to have a glimpse of; revoir, to see again; and, pre'voir, to fore- see. Observe, however, that this last verb makes in the Future, je prevoirai, tu pre'voiras, &c., and in the Con- ditional, je prevoirais, &c. A'ote. Many poets, ancient and modern, for the sake of rhyme, write without j, je voi, faperfoi, je prtvoi, etc. 275. Surseoir, to put off (a law term), though a com- pound of seoir, is conjugated like voz'r, except in the Future, je surseoirai, and in the Conditional,^ surseoirais. EXERCISE XCH. I see it now. I saw it with my own eyes. That maintenant. ind-4 de propre reform (will take place), but we sfiall not see it You shall reforme f. aura lieu see what I can do. Let us see your purchases. See the ce que sais faire. emplette f. admirable order of the universe: does it not announce a 2 l ordrero.. universm. annoncer supreme architect? When shall we see your sisters again? Quand To finish their affairs, it would be necessary that they Pour affaire f. falloir should see each other. Wise men foresee events. s'entrevoir subj-2 art. 2 J art. I shall not put off the pursuit of that affair. poursuite f. pi. OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 145 276. VOULOIR, TO WILL; TO BE WILLING; TO WISH. Part. Pres. voulant. Part . Past, voulu. ISO. ) Pres. f Imp Pret. Fut. COXD. ) Pres. \ blPER. SUBJ.) Pres. j Imp. Je veux, nous voulons, Je voulais, nous voulions, Je voulus, nous voulumes, Je voudrai, nous voudrons, Je voudrais, nous voudrions, Veuillez, gje veuille, O*nous voulions, tu veux, vous voulez, tu voulais, vous vouliez, tu voulus, vous voulutes, tu voudras, vous voudrez, tu voudrais, vous voudriez, il veut ; ils veulent. il voulait ; ils voulaieut. il voulut ; ils voulurent. il voudra ; ils voudront. il voudrait ; ils voudraient. The second pers. pi. is the only one used, and sig- nifies, be so good as, be so kind as to.* tu veuilles, vous vouliez, il veuille ; ils veuillent. je voulusse, tu voulusses, il voulut ; voulussions, vous voulussiez, ils voulussent. tgr- Observe tliat the Subjunctive Present Is que je veuille; but the plural it que nous voulions, que vous vouliez; and not que nous vevillions, que vous veuilliei, us some writers have it. EXERCISE XCIII. I can and will tell the truth. He wishes to set out pron. dire veritef. * to-morrow. If you are willing, he will be willing also demain. le le aussi. We wish to he free. He wished to accompany me. They * libre * accompagner On will give you whatever you wish. I should wish (him to come). tout ce que ind-7 qu'il vint. - He would wish to speak to you in private. * * en particulier. Have the goodness to read this letter. Heaven wills it so. Vouloir * lire art. ainsi. Some admit of a second Imperative, veux, voulons, voulez, but they use It only in very rare instances, as in this phrase, Vocixws, et nous pourrotu. 146 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS IV. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 277. ABSOUDRE, TO ABSOLVE. Part. Pres. absolvant. Part. Past, absous, m. ; absoute,/. IND. > Pres. j Tmp. J'absous, nous absolvons, J'absolvais, nous absolvions, (No Preterite Definite.) tu absous, vous absolvez, tu absolvais, vous absolviez, il absout ; ils absolvent. il absolvait ; ils absolvaient. Put. J'absoudrai, tu absoudras, il absoudra ; nous absoudrons, vous absoudrez, ils absoudront. COND. ") J'absoudrais, tu absoudrais, il absoudrait ; Pres. j nous absoudrions, vous absoudriez, ils absoudraient. IMPER. absous, qu'il absolve ; absolvons, absolvez, qu'ils absolvent. SUBJ. \ gj'absolve, tu absolves, il absolve ; Pres. jo>nous absolvions, vous absolviez, ils absolvent. (No Imperfect of the Subjunctive.) 278. Conjugate in the same manner, dissoudre, to dissolve. ABSTRAIRE, to abstract, is conjugated like traire, but is little used ; it is more customary to say faire abstrac- tion de. ACCROIRE is used in the Present of the Infinitive only, with any of the tenses of the verb faire, when it signifies, faire croire ce qui n'est pas, to make one believe what is not true, to impose upon one. ACCROITRE, to increase, is conjugated like croitre. ADMETTRE, to admit, like mettre. ATTEINDRE, to reach. See Peindre. 279. ATTRAIRE, to attract, to allure, is used only in the Infinitive : Le sel est Ion pour attraire les pigeons, salt is good for attracting pigeons. Attirer often sup- plies its place, and is more harmonious. OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION'. 147 280. BATTRE, TO BEAT. Part. Pres. battant. IND. ) Je bats, Pres. ) nous battons, Imp. Je battais, nous battions, Pret. Je battis, nous battimes, Je battrai, nous battrons, Je battrais, nous battrions, IMFER. battons, SUBJ. > gje batte, Pres. j O'nous battions, Imp. 2je battisse, O"nous battissions, Part. Past, battu. Fut. COXD. ") 1'i'es. / tu bats, il bat ; vous battez, ils battent. tu battais, il battait ; vous battiez, ils battaieut. tu battis, il battit ; vous battites, ils battirent. tu battras, il battra ; vous battrez, ils battront. tu battrais, il battrai t ; vous battriez, ils battraieut. bats, qu'il batte ; battez, qu'ils battent. tu battes, il batte ; vous battiez, ils battent. tu battisses, il battit ; voud battissiez, ils batti.ssent. 281. Conjugate in the same manner: Abattre, to pull down. combattre, tojight. de"battre, to debate. rabattre, to abate. rebattre, to beat again. se de"battre, to struggle. EXERCISE XCIV. I pardon you in consideration of your repentance. absoudre faveur repentir. She was acquitted. These acids dissolve metals. After the ind-3 absoudre acide art. death of Alexander, his empire was dissolved. Why do you m. beat my dog? Our left wing beat the right wing chien m. 2 gauche l aile f. ind-3 Adroit 1 of the enemy. Believe me, general, we shall beat them pi. Croyez-moi 87 The cannon beat down the walls of the fortress. canon m. abattre ind-3 muraille f. forteresse f. They fought bravely on both sides. They have On ind-4 vaillamment de part et d'autre. lla discussed that question. Beat these mattresses again, debattre f. matelas ra. 148 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS 282. B01RE, TO DRINK. Part. Past, bu. Part. Pres. buvant. IND. ) Je bois, Pres. j nous buvons, Imp. Je buvais, nous buvions, Fret. Je bus, nous bumes, Fut. Je boirai, nous boirons, Je boirais, nous boirions, IMPER. buvons, SUBJ. ) gje boive, Pres. jo'nous buvions, Imp. je busse, O'nous bussions, 283. CONCLURE, TO CONCLUDE. Part. Pres. concluant. Part. Past, conclu,w. ; con clue,/. COND. ) Pres. j tu bois, il boit ; vous buvez, ils boivent. tu buvais, il buvait ; vous buviez, ils buvaient tu bus, ilbut; vous butes, ils burent. tu boiras, il boira ; vous boirez, ils boiront. tu boirais, il boirait; vous boiriez, ils boiraient. bois, qu'il boive ; buvez, qu'ils boivent. tu boives, il boive ; vous buviez, ils boivent. tu busses, il but ; vous bussiez, ils bussent. IND. \ Je conclus, Pres. j nous concluons, tu conclus, vous concluez, il conclut ; ils concluent. Imp. Je concluais, nous conclu'ions, tu concluais, vous couclu'icz, il concluait; ils concluaient. Pret. Je conclus, nous concludes, tu conclus, vous conclutes, il conclut ; ils conclurent. Fut. Je conclurai, nous conclurons, tu concluras, vous conclurez, il conclura ; ils concluront. COND. ) Je conclurais, Pres. f nous conclurions, tu conclurais, vous concluriez, il conclurait ; ils concluraient. IMPER. concluons, conclus, concluez, qu'il conclue ; qu'ils coucluent SUBJ. "I g je conclue, Pres j" O'nous concluions, tu conchies, vous conchuez, il conclue ; ils concluent. Imp. Sjje conclusse, O*uous conclussions, tu conclusses, vous conclussiez, il conclut; ils conclussent. Conjugate in the same manner, exchtre, to exclude. OF THE FODHTI1 COXJUGATIOX. 149 EXERCISE XCV. I hare the honour of drinking your health. Ills best de inf-1 a santef. wine is drunk. Tin's paper blots. They drank two bottles rm m. boire bouteille of champaign. I shall drink a glass of white wine. Let us champagne. verre m. 2 drink to the health of our friends. Come, drink. I never saute f. Allans drink wine. Since he has not arrived, I conclude that he will 154 Puisqu' est en not come. What do you conclude from all this ? They have Que 101 concluded the bargain. He was excluded from the assembly. marchem. assembler f. 284. CONDUIRE, TO CONDUCT; TO LEAD. Part. Pres. conduisant. Part. Past, conduit, m.; con duite,/. IM>. "I Je conduis, JYes. J nous conduisons, 7;np. Je conduisais, nous conduisions, Prct. Jcconduisis, nous conduisimes, Put. Je conduirai, nous conduirons, Je conduirais, nous couduirions, COXD. 1 Pres. \ IMPER. conduisons, SUBJ. "I je conduise, Pres. j O'nous conduisions, Imp. 2je conduisisse, O'nous conduisissions, tu conduis, vous conduisez, tu conduisais, vous conduisiez, tu conduisis, vous conduisites, tu conduiras, vous concluirez, tu conduirais, vous couduiriez, conduis, conduisez, tu conduises, vous conduisiez, tu conduisisses, vous conduisissiez, il conduit ; ils conduisent. il conduisait ; ils conduisaient. il conduisit ; ils conduisirent. il conduira ; ils conduiront. il conduirait ; ils conduiraient. qu'il conduise ; qu'ilsconduisent. il conduise ; ils conduisent. il conduisit ; ils conduisissent. 285. Conjugate in the same manner: Construire, cuire, d^duire, d^truire, instruire, to construct, to cook, to bake, to deduct, to destroy, to instruct. introduire, produire, reconduire, re"duire, traduire, to introduce, to produce, to reconduct. to reduce, to translate- 150 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS 286. Nuire, to hurt, is conjugated like conduire ; but its past participle is nui, which has no feminine. EXERCISE XCVL This road leads to the town. Moses conducted the chemin m. Mo'tse people of Israel. They built several ships. This peuplem. Israel. construire .vaisseaum. baker bakes twice a day Deduct what you have boulanger deux fois par ce que received. Tune destroys everything 1 . The overflowing- art, tout . debordemcnt m. of the river destroyed his crop. Those who instruct riviere f. recoite f. art. youth, (must arm themselves) with patience. I shall inform jeunesse f. doivent s'armer de instruire his family of his conduct. He introduced me into the king's famillef. conduitef. dans 2 closet. This country lias produced many great men ^cabinet m. pays m. beaucoup de What book are you translating f This is well translated livre m. 101 Translate this. That affair has hurt his reputation. 96 affaire f. a. 287. CON FIRE, TO PICKLE, TO PRESERVE. Part. Pres. confisant. Part. Past) confit, m. ; confitej/. INC. ) Je confis^ Pres. j nous confisons, tu confis, vous confisez, il confit ; ils confisent. Imp. Je confisais, nous confisions, tu confisais, vous confisierij il confisait 5 ils confisaient. Fret. Je confisj nous confimes, tu confis, vous confiteSj il confit 5 ils confirent. Fut. Je confirai, nous confirons, tu confiras, vous confirez, il confira ; ils confiront. COND. ) Je confirais, Pres. ) nous coufirions, tu confirais, vous confiriez, il confirait ; ils confiraicnt OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 151 IMPER. confisons, SUBJ. ) je confise, Pres. j O'nous confisions, Imp. je confisse, <5nous confissions, confis, confisez, tu confises, vous confisiez, tu confisses, vous confissiez, qu'il confise ; qu'ils confisent. il confise ; ils confisent. il confit ; ils confissent. 288. Suffire, to suffice, to be sufficient, is conjugated like confire ; but its past participle is siiffi, which has no feminine. EXERCISE XCVII. I shall preserve some fruits this year. Will you preserve - annee f. these cherries with sugar or with brandy? Preserve cerise f. a art. art. eau-de-vie f. some apricots and peaches. Have you pickled any abricot m. 32 peche f. cucumbers ? Little suffices to the wise. A hundred concombre m. Pen de bien s. * pounds a year suffice him for his maintenance livres sterling par an subsistance f. If he lose that lawsuit, all his property will not suffice __ perd proces m. bien m. y That would not suffice me. That sum is not sufficient to somme f. pour pay your debts. Here are three thousand francs, will that dctte f. Void - be enough? That is enough Do you like pickled walnuts ? suffire aimer art. 2 *noix f. 289. CONNAITRE, TO KNOW. Part. Prcs. connaissant. Part. Past, connu. I.M). ) Jc connais, tu connais, il commit; J'rcs. j" nous connaissons, vous connaissez, ils connaiasent. Imp. Je connaissais, tu connaissais, il connaissait ; nous connaissions, vous connaissiez, ils connaissaient Pret. Je connus, tu connus, il connut ; nous connumes, vous connutes, ils connurent. 152 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VEHBS IND. ) Je connaitrai, tu connaitras, ilcoimaitra; Fut. \ nous connaitrons, vous connaitrez, ils connaitroiit. COND. ) Je counaitrais, tu connaitrais, il connaitrait ; Pres. \ nous connaitrions, vous connaitriez, ils connaitraient IMPER. connais, qu'il connaisse ; connaissons, connaissez, qu'ils connaissent. SUBJ. ) g je connaisse, tu connaisses, il connaisse ; Pres. \ O"nous connaissions, vous counaissiez, ils connaissent. Imp. g je connusse, tu connusses, il conniit ; G?nous connussions, vous connussiez, ils connussent. 03T See No. 268, for Remark on Savoir and Connailre. 290. Conjugate in the same manner : Disparaitre, to disappear. I reconnaltre, to know again. paraitre, to appear. \ reparaitre, to appear again. EXERCISE XCVIU. I know him perfectly. He knows his (weak side.; parfaitement, faible m. We know nobody in this neighbourhood. Do you know our 116 voisinage m. house? He knew me by my voice. I would know him d * art. voix f. among a thousand. The compass was not known to the entre * boussolef. de ancients. At the approach of our troops, the enemy disappeared, approchef. pi. It seems you are wrong. You do not appear paraitre que avoir tort. convinced. Do you not recognise me? I recognise you. convaincu rcconnaitre Do they acknowledge their errors ? He knew his horse again, reconnattre CONTREDIRE, to contradict ; see Dire. 01 THE CONJUGATION. 153 291. COULEE, TO SEW. Part. Prcs. cousant. Part. Past, cousu. IND. ) Prcs. \ Je couds, nous cousons, tu couds, vous cousez, il coud : ils cousent. Imp. Je cousais, nous cousions, tu cousais, vous cousiez, il cousait ; ils cousaient. Pret. Je cousis, nous couslmes, tu cousis, vous cousltes, il cousit ; ils cousirent. Fat. Je coudrai, nous coudrons, tu coudras, vous coudrez, il coudra ; ils coudront. COND. j Prcs. \ Je coudrais, nous coudrions, tu coudrais, vous coudriez, il coudrait ; ils coudraient. LlI'ER. cousons, couds, cousez, qu'il couse ; qu'ils cousent. SUBJ. ) Pres. j 2je couse, C*nous cousions, tu couses, vous cousiez, il couse ; ils cousent. Imp. ije cousisse, nous cousissions, tu cousisses, vous cousissiez, il cousit ; ils cousissent. 292. De'coudre, to unsew, and recoudre, to sew again, arc conjugated in the same manner. 293. GRAIN DRE, TO FEAR. Part. Pres. craiguant. Part. Past, craiut, m.; craiute,/. IND. ) Je crains, tu crains, il craint ; Pres. \ nous craignons, vous craignez, ils craignent. Imp. Je craignais, tu craignais, il craignait ; nous craignions, vous craigniez, ils craignaient. Pret. Je craignis, tu craignis, il craignit ; nous craignimes, vous craignites, ils craignirent. Fut. Je craindrai, tu craindras, il craindra ; nous craindrons, vous craindrez, ils craindront. COND. | Je craindrais, tu craindrais, il craindrait ; Pres. j nous craiudrions, vous craindriez, ils craindraient. I.Ml'KK. craignons, crains, craignez, qu'il craigne ; qu'ils craignent RUM. ) gje craigne, tu craignes, il craigne ; Pres. \ C*nous craignions, vous craigniez, ils craignent. Imp. 2 je craignisse, tu craignisses, il craignit ; O'nous craignissious, vous craignissiez, ils craiguissent 154 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS 294. Conjugate after the same manner, all verbs ending in aindre and oindre ; as, plaindre, to pity, and joindre, to join. When plaindre is used reflectedly, it signifies to complain : Je vous plains, mais JE ne ME PLAINS pas de vous, I pity you, but I do not complain of you. EXERCISE XCIX. That girl sews well. My sisters were sewing all yesterday. ind-3 " hier. Sew a button on this waistcoat That is badly sewed. boutonm. a giletm. mat Ills coat was torn, but his tailor sewed it again very habit m. dechire tailleur neatly. He is afraid of being discovered. He was a man proprement. craindre d' inf-1 decouvert. C' who feared nothing 1 . I pity Ms family. He complains ind-2 famille f. se plaindre without cause. They were always complaining. They united svjet. *toujours 4nd-2 joindre their efforts. Let us unite prudence with courage. m. art. f. cL art. m. 295. CROIRE, TO BELIEVE. Part. Pres. croyant. Part. Past, cru, m. ; crue, /. IND. ) Je crois, tu crois, il croit : Pres. \ nous croyons, vous croyez, ils croient. Imp. Je croyais, tu croyais, il croyait ; nous croyions, vous croyiez, ils croyaient. Pret. Je crus, tu crus, il crut ; nous crumes, vous crutes, ils crurent. Put. Je croirai, tu croiras, il croira ; nous croirons, vous croirez, ils croiront. COMX ) Je croirais, tu croirais, il croirait ; Pres. \ nous croirions, vous croiriez, iis croiraient. IMPER. crois, qu'il croie ; croyons, croyez, qu'ils croient. SUBJ. | je croie, tu croies, il croie ; Pres. ) O'nous croyions, vous croyiez, ils croient. Imp. gje crusse, <^nous crussions, tu crusses, vous crussiez, il crut ; ils crussent. OP THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 155 296. REMARK. Some people put the preposition de after the verb croz're, when followed by an infinitive ; but this is contrary to the practice of the best writers ; we must say : fai cru bien faire, and not j'ai cru DE bien faire, I thought I was doing well. 297. CR01TRE, TO GROW. il croit ; ils croisaent. il croissait ; ils croissaicnt. il crut ; ils crurent. il croitra ; ils croitront. il croltrait ; ils croltraient. qu'il croisse ; qu'ils croissent. il croisse ; ils croissent. ilcrut; ils crussent. 298. Conjugate in the same manner, accroitrc, to in- crease, and decroitre, to decrease. Accra and decru, past Participles of accroitre and dtcroitre, arc written with- out any accent (Acad.) EXERCISE C. I believe you. She believes only what she sees. Do ne que ce qu' you think that I wish to deceive you? He thought croire vouloir subj-1 * trompcr ind-2 to gain his lawsuit. They thought they heard some cries. * gagner ind-3 * inf-l mm. 1 should think (I would be wanting) in my duty. Believe manquer d, devoir m. nothing of all that He tlwught he was doing well The ind-4 Part. Pres. croissant. Part. Past, e I\D. > Je crois, Pres. } nous croissons, tu crois, vous croissez, Imp. Je croissais, nous croissions, tu croissais, vous croissiez, Prct. Je crus, nous crdmes, tu crus, vous crutes, Fut. Je croltrai, nous croitrons, tu croitras, vous croitrez, Co>i>. ") Je croitrais, Pres. ) nous croitrions, tu croitrais, vous croitriez, IMTER. crois, croissons, croissez, SPBJ. ") 2je croisse, Pres. j i^nous croissions, tu croisses, vous croissiez, Imp. gje crusse, nous crussions, tu crusses, vous crussiez, Io6 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS vine does not grow in cold countries. These plants vigne f. art. 2 l pays m. plante f. grow on the margin of streams His fortune increases bord m. art. ruisseau m. f. s' every day. The river has fallen two inches. tons les jours. riviere f. decroitre de pouce m After Midsummer, the days begin to shorten. decroitre. Midsummer, la Saint-Jean 299. DIRE, TO SAY, TO TELL. Part. Pres. disant. Part. Past, dit, m. ; dite, /. IXD. "1 Je dis, tu dis, ildit; Pres. j nous disons, vous dites, ils disent. Imp. Je disais, tu disais, il disait ; nous disions, vous disiez, ils disaieut. Pret. Je dis, tu dis, ildit; nous dimes, vous dites, ils dirent. Put. Je dirai, tu diras, il dira ; nous dirons, vous direz, ils diront. COND. ") Je dirais, tu dirais, il dirait ; Pres. j nous dirions, vous diriez, ils diraieut. IMPER. dis, qu'il dise ; disons, dites, qu'ils disent. SUBJ. > gje dise, Pres. j O'nous disions, tu discs, vous disiez, il dise ; ils disent. Imp. je disse, tu disses, ildit; Q'uous dissions, vous dissiez, ils dissent. ,> r ih f of ^|,P I contredisez. dedisez. interdisez - 300. Redire, to say again, is conjugated like dire ; but contredire, to contradict,'} dedire, to disown, interdire, to prohibit, medire, to slander, prcdire, to foretell, J ' predisez. 301. Maudire, to curse, is conjugated like dire, except that it takes double s in the Part. pres. maudissant ; in the IND. pres. nous maudissons, vous maudissez, ils maudissent ; in the Imperf. je maudissais, etc. ; in the IMPER. qu'il maudisse, maudissons, etc., and in the SUBJ. que je mau- disse, que tu maudisses, etc. OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 157 EXERCISE CI. He tells all he knows. Those who say : I shall not ce qu' savoir Ceux work, are the most miserable. Tell us which you would travailler prefer. You always contradict me. That physician prohibits preferer 3 1 medecin wine to all his patients He slanders everybody, art. malade de tout le monde. The makers of almanacs foretell rain and fine faiseur almanack art. pluie f. art. weather. Do not say: That man is of one people, and temps ra. Celui-ld, peuple m. I am of another people : for all peoples have had on Tnot car art. earth the same father, who was Adam, and have in art. ind-2 heaven the same father, who is God. art. del m. DISSOUDRE is conjugated like alsoudre; see p. 146. 302. ECLORE, to be hatched, as birds, or to blow like a flower, is used only in the present of the Infinitive ; in the Part, past, eclos, f. e'close, and in the third persons of the following tenses : IND. pres. il e'clot, its eclosent ; Fut. ileclura, ils e'cloront ; COND. il eclvrait, ils ecloraient ; SUBJ. pres. qu'il e'close, qu'ils eclosent. But its compound tenses, which are formed with etre, are much in use. The primitive of e'clore is clore, to close, to shut. Another compound is enclore, to enclose. 303. ECRIRE, TO WRITE. Part. Pres. e"crivant. Part . Past, e"crit. IND. \ 1'ra. j" J't-cria, nous ecrivons, tu ecris, vous e*crivez, il dcrit ; ils e'crivent. Imp. J'ecrivais, nous e*crivions, tu ecrivais, vous e*criviez, il ccrivait ; ils e"crivaient. Pret. J'ecrivia, nous e*crivimes, tu ecrivis, vous ccrivites, il Je fais, Pres. f nous faisons, tu fais, vous faites, ilfait; ils font. Imp. Je faisais, nous faisions, tu faisais, vous faisiez, il faisait ; ils faisaient. Pret. Je fis, nous fimes, tu fis, vous fites, ilfit; ils firent. Fut. Je ferai, nous ferons, tu feras, vous ferez, il fera ; ils feront. COND. 1 Je ferais, Pres. j nous ferions, tu ferais, vous feriez, il ferait ; ils feraient. IMPER. faisons, fais, faites, qu'il fasse ; qu'Us fasseut. SUBJ. \ 2je fasse, Pres. jO'nous fassions, tu fasses, vous fassiez, il fasse ; ils fassent. Imp. je fisse, O^ous fissions, tu fisses, vous fissiez, il fit ; ils fissent. Jfote.Tho diphthong ai having the sound ofe mute, In faisant, nous faitont, jc I'aitais, as well as in the derivatives bien/aiiant, bienfaisance, contre/aisant, etc. Voltaire, and many writers, after his example, have substituted e mute instead of ai. But liumarsais, CondiUae, Girard, Beauzte, D'Olivet, and Domtrgue, have con- stantly opposed the adoption of this change, and the French Academy, the best Judges in thig matter, have formally rejected it. 306. Conjugate like/azre: contrefaire, to counterfeit, to [mimic. dufaire, to undo, to defeat. refaire, to do again. satisfaire, to satisfy. surfaire, to exact, to overcharge. EXERCISE CUI. I do my duty; do yours Everything she does, she devoir m. Tout ce qu' does well. Pliny relates that Caesar took above le Pline rapporter faire ind-3 plus de 800,000 prisoners The emperor has made him a knight * chevalier of the legion of honour. She mimics everybody. What tout le mondc. Ce que 160 IRRKGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS the one does, the other undoes. Penelope undid, at night, le Penelope ind-2 * art. the work she had done during the day The fleet ouvrage m. qu' * flotte f. of the enemy was completely defeated. If it were pi. ind-3 completement c' ind-2 to do again, I tvould not do it. That scholar pleases all a satisfaire his masters You ask too much for your goods. surfaire * marchandiscf. FEINDRE, to feign, is conjugated like peindre. 307. FRIRE, to fry, besides the Present of the Infinitive, is used only in the singular of the Present of the Indica- tive, Je fris, tu fris, il frit ; in the Future, Je frirai, tu f/'iras, ilfrira, nous frirons, vousfrirez, ilsfriront; in the Conditional, Jefrirais, tufrirais, il.frirait, nous fririons, vous fririez, Us fnraient ; in the second person singular of the Imperative, fris ; and in the compound tenses, which are formed witli the Participle pa'st, frit, frite. To supply the persons and tenses which are wanting, we make use of the verb faire prefixed to the Infinitive frire ; as, Nous faisons frire, vous faites frire, Us font frire ; je faisais frire, etc. 308. LIRE, TO READ. Part. Pres. lisant. Part. Past, lu. LVD. ) Pres. j Je lis, nous lisons, tu lis, _ vous lisez, il lit ; ils lisent. Imp. Je lisais, nous lisions, tu lisais, vous lisiez, il lisait ; ils lisaieut. Pret. Je lus, nous lumes, tu lus, vous lutes, illut; ils lurent. Fut. Je h'rai, nous lirons, tu liras, vous lirez, il lira ; ils liront. COND. ") Pres. j" Je lirais, nous lirious, tu lirais, vous liriez, il lirait ; ils liraient. IMPEB. Usons, lis, lisez, qu'il Use ; qu'ils lisent. OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 1G1 SUBJ. ) 2 je lise, tu Uses, il lise ; Pres. j O"nous lisions, vous lisiez, ils liseiit. Imp. je lusse, tu lusses, il Kit ; C'nous lussions, vous lussiez, ila lussent. A'ote. The regular mode of Interrogation is, lii-je bienf and not lisi-jK lien ? If lit-je t'ien be thought harsh to the ear, another turn of expression may be adopted. (A CAD., Th. Corneille.) See page 87, Kern. 6th. 309. Elire, to elect, and retire, to read again, are con- jugated like lire. 310. LUIRE, TO SHINE. Part. Pr&s. luisant. Par<. Past, lui, m. No feminine. IXD. ) Pres. \ Je luis, tu luis, nous luisons, vous luisez, il luit; ils luisent. Imp. Je luisais, tu luisais, nous luisions, vous luisiez, il luisait; ils luisaient. (So Preterite Definite.) Put. Je luirai, tu luiras, nous luirons, vous luirez, 51 luira ; ils luirout. COXD. ) Pres. \ Je luirais, tu luirais, nous luirions, vous luiriez, il luirait ; ils luiraient. (Ko Imperative.) STOJ. ) Pra. | Que je luise, que tu luises, que nous luisions, que vous luisiez, qu'il luise ; qu'ils luisent. (So Imperfect of the Sutyunctive.} 311. Reluire, to shine, to glitter, is conjugated like luirc, but the Participle present has never been used in a figurative sense. MAUDIRE, to curse; see page 156. EXERCISE CIV. Get that fish fried. The soles are not yet fried. Faites * *poisson m. Unf-1 f. encore I am reading the Roman history. She reads well. They read distinctly. What author do you read in your class? distinctement. auteur m. classe f. We are reading Don Quixote. He is a man who has read Qmchotte. C' * L 162 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS (a great deal). He can neither read nor write. Read that *beaucoup ne salt ni ni letter again They elected him for their representative. We ind-3 representant. shall elect the most worthy The sun shines for everybody. digne. tout le monde. Everything- shines in that house All that glitters is not gold. Tout ce qui 312. MET TEE, TO PUT. Part. Pres. mettant. Part. Past, mis. IND. \ Je mets, tu mets, il met; Pres. f nous mettons, vous mettez, ils mettent. Imp. Je mettais, tu mettais, il mettait ; nous mettions, vous mettiez, ils mettaient. Pret. Je mis, tu mis, il mit; nous mimes, vous mites, ils mirent. Fut. Je mettrai, tu mettras, il mettra ; nous mettrons, vous mettrez, ils mettront. COND. > Je mettrais, tu mettrais, il mettrait ; Pres. ) nous mettrions, vous mettriez, ils mettraient IMPEE. mets, qu'il mette ; mettons, mettez, qu'ils mettent. SUBJ. ) je mette, Pres. j c^nous mettions, tu incites, vous mettiez, il mette ; ils metteut. Imp. 2J je misse, tu misses, ilmit: (5-nous missions, vous missiez, ils missent. 313. Conjugate in the same manner: Admettre, to admit. commettre, to commit. compromettre, to compromise. s'entremettre, to intermeddle. emettre, permettre, promettre, remettre, soumettre, to omit, to permit, to promise, toput again; toput to submit. [off. transmettre,tfo transmit. EXERCISE CV. Put on your hat. You have put (the cart before the * chapeau m. la charrue decant Ics horse). I do not admit that principle. They committed bceufs. principe m ind-3 de OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 163 great excesses. I shall not compromise you. Diocletian exces m. DiocUticn resigned the empire I shall omit nothing that depends iu'd-3 de m. de ce qui dSpendre upon me to serve you. The law of Mahomet does not ind-7 de pour allow wine. Allow me to tell you. He promises enough, pcrmettre art. de assez but he seldom keeps his word. Do not defer till to- *rarement 1 parole f. remettre a morrow what you can do to-day. They submit to your ce que aujourdhui. se decision. His actions will transmit his name to posterity. art. 314. MOUDRE, TO GRIND (corn, coffee, &c.) Part. Pres. moulant. Part. Past, moulu. LVD. ) Je mouds, tu mouds, il moud ; Pres. \ nous moulons, vous moulez, ils moulent. Imp. Je moulais, tu moulais, il moulait ; nous moulions, vous mouliez, Ils moulaient. Pret. Je moulus, tu moulus, il moulut ; nous moulumes, vous moulutes, ils moulurent. Fut. Je moudrai, tu moudras, il moudra ; nous moudrons, vous moudrez, ils moudront. COND. ) Je moudrais, tu moudrais, il moudrait ; Pres. \ nous moudrions, vous moudriez, ils moudraient. IMPER. mouds, qu'il moule ; moulons, moulez, qu'ils moulent. SUBJ. ) je moule, tu moules, il moule ; Pres. > O"nous moulions, vous mouliez, ils moulent. Imp. je moulusse, tu moulusses, il moulut ; O"nous moulussions, vous moulussiez, ils moulussent. 315. Conjugate in the same manner : bmo\\(]rc,to grind (knives, razors, &c.) re*moudre, to grindagain remoudre, to grind again (corn, &c.) (knives, razors, &c.) IND. Pres. 31G. NAITRE, TO BE BORN. Part. Pres. naissant. Part. Past, no. Jc naia, timaia, ilnait; nous naissons. ils nais?cnt. 164 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS IND. \ Je naissais, Imp. j nous naissions, tu naissais, vous naissiez, Pret. Je naquis, nous naquimes, tu naquis, vous naquites, Fut. Je naitrai, nous naitrons, tu naitras, vous naitrez, COSD. \ Je naitrais, Pres. j nous naitrions, tu naitrais, vous naitriez, IMPER. nais, naissons, naissez, SUBJ. / 2je naisse, Pres. \ O'nous naissions, tu naisses, vous naissiez, Imp. gje naquisse, tu naquisses, il naissait ; ils naissaient. il naquit ; ils naquirent. il naitra ; ils naitront. il naitrait ; ils naitraient. qu'il naisse ; qu'ils naissent. il naisse ; ils naissent. il naquit ; O'uous naquissions, vous naquissiez, ils naquissent. 317. This verb takes the auxiliary etre ; but renaitre, to be born again, has no participle past, and, therefore, no compound tenses. NUIRE, to hurt; see page 150, No. 286. IXSTRUIRE, to instruct, is conjugated like Conduire. EXERCISE CVI. This mill does not grind fine enough. Grind some moulin m. *fin x pepper. Are my scissors ground ? From labour poivrem. ciseauxm.pl. &rt.travailm. springs health; from health contentment, source of naitre art. art. art. every joy. Abraham was born about three hundred and tout joief. ind-3 environ * fifty years after the deluge. Moses u-as born a hundred years an m. Mo'ise * after the death of Jacob. Napoleon Bonaparte was born at Napoleon Ajaccio, in Corsica, on the 15th of August 1769. They en Corse * were born on the same day. Many diseases spring * Beaucoup de maladie from intemperance. Even-thing revives in spring. Tout renaitre a art. OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 165 318. PAITRE, TO GRAZE. J'art. Prcs. paissant. Part. Past, pu, m. No feminine. IND. 1 Jc pais, tu pais, I'rcs. jT nous paissous, vous paissez, il pait ; ils paissent. Imp. Je paissais, tu paissais, nous paissions, vous paissiez, (Xo Preterite Definite.) Fut. Je paitrai, tu paltras, nous paitrons, vous paitrez, il paissaifc; ils paissaient. il paitra ; ils paitrout. COXD. ) Je paitrais, tu paltrais, 1 'res. j nous paitrions, vous paitriez, il paltrait ; ils paltraieut. IMI'EK. pais, paissona, paissez, qu'il paisse ; qu'ils paissent. SUBJ. ) je paisse, tu paisses, Prcs. j~ O'nous paissions, vous paissiez, qu'il paisse ; qu'ils paissent. f.Vo Imperfect of the Subjunctive.) 319. liepaitre, to feed, is conjugated in the same manner, and has, besides, a Preterite Definite, je repus, and an Imperfect of the Subjunctive, que je repusse. PAKAITHK, to appear, is conjugated like Connaitre. 320. PEINDRE, TO PAINT. Part. Pres. poignant. Part. Past, peint, m. ; peinte,/. INK. \ Jepeins, tu peins, il peint ; I'rcs. ) nous peignons, vous peignez, ils peignent. Imp. Je peignais, tu peignais, il peignait ; nous peignions, vous peigniez, ils peignaient. Prct. Je peignis, tu peignis, il peignit ; nous peignime*, vous peignites, ils peignirent. Fut. Je peindrai, tu peindras, il peindra ; nous peindrons, vous peindrez, ils peindront. COND. ) Je peindrais, tu peindrais, il peindrait ; Prcs. ) nous peindrions, vous peindriez, ils peindraient. IMIT.K. peins, qu'il peigne ; peignons, peignez, qu'ils peignent. SUBJ. 1 2je peigne, tu peignes, il peigne ; I'rcs. y O'nous peignions, vous peigniez, ils peignent. Imp. Sje peignisse, tu peignisses, il peignit ; C'lious peignis&ions, vous peignissic^:. ils peignissent. 166 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS 321. Conjugate after the same manner all verbs ending in eindre ; as, Astreindre, to bind, to subject. I G'nous resolvions, tu resolves, vous resolviez, il resolve ; ils resolvent. Imp. gje resolusse, tu re"solusses, il resolut ; 327. N.B. When resoudre signifies to determine, to decide, the Part, past, re'solu, m. resolue, f. is to be em- ployed ; but if it mean to change, to reduce, or turn one thing into another, then the Participle resous (without feminine), is to be used : Ce jeune homme a resolu de changer de conduite. Le soleil a resous le brouillard en pluie. This young man has resolved to change his conduct. The sun has turned the Joy into rain. OF THE FODRTU CONJUGATION. 169 IND. \ Pres. ) Imp. Pret. 328. EIRE, TO LAUGH. Part. Pres. riant. Part. Past, ri, m. No feminine tu ris, vous riez, tu riais, vous riiez, tu ris, vous rites, tu riras, vous rirez, tu rirais, vous ririez, ris, riez, tu ries, vous riiez, turisses, vous rissiez, Je ris, nous riong, Je riais, nous riions, Je ris, nous rimes, Fut. Je rirai, nous rirons, Je rirais, nous ririons, COXD. \ Pres. ) IMPER. rions, .Sriu. \_ gje rie, Pres. jc'nous riions, Imp. 2> Je risse, il rit ; ils rient. il riait ; ils riaient. il rit ; ils rireiit. il rira ; ils riront. il rirai t ; ils riraient. qu'il rie ; qu'ils ricnt ilrie; ils rient. C"uous rissions. . ils rissent. Hire is also used with a double pronoun, in the sense of to laugh at, to ridicule ; as, JE ME RIS de ses menaces, i laugh at his threats. Sourire, to smile, is conjugated in the same manner. SUFFIRE, to suffice, to be sufficient ; see No. 288. EXERCISE CIX. We resolved to set out immediately. Have they resolved ind-3 de sur-le-champ. A-t-on on peace or war? Everybody is laughing at his * art. art. Tout le monde d expense. She was laughing most heartily. They were depnns m. pi. de tout son cceur. laughing (in their sleeves). They laughed even to tears . sous cape. * art. larme You make me laugh. Fortune smiles on him. She smiled art. - f. * lui ind-2 at my embarrassment. He smiled to him, in sign of approbation. de embarrasm. ind-3 en - He came up to me smiling. ind-3 au-devant de moi en 170 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS 329. SUIVRE, TO FOLLOW. Part. Pres. suivant. Part . Past, sui?i. tusuis, ilsuit; vous suivez, ils suivent. tu suivais, il suiyait ; vous suiviez, ils suivaient tu suivis, il suivit ; vous suivites, ils suivirent tu suivras, il suiyra ; vous suivrez, ils suivront. tu suivrais, il suivrait ; vous suivriez, ils suivraient. suis, qu'il suiye ; suivez, qu'ils suivent. tu suives, il suiye ; vous suiviez, ils suivent. tu suivisses, il suivit ; vous suivissiez, ils suivissent. IND. ) Je suis, Pres. j nous suivons, Imp. Je suivais, nous suivions, Fret. Je suivis, nous suivimes, Fut. Je suivrai, nous suivrons, OND. > Pres. f IMPER. suivons, SUBJ. ) gje suive ? Pres. jo'nous suivions, Imp. je suivisse, O*nous suivissions, nous suivrions, Conjugate in the same manner, poursuivre, to pursue, to prosecute. S'ensuivre, to ensue, to result, follows the same con- jugation, but is used only in the third persons singular and plural of every tense ; as, Un grand bien s'ensuivit. (AcAD.) [ Much good resulted from it. SURVIVES, to survive, is conjugated like Vivre. 330. TAIRE, TO CONCEAL, TO KEEP SECRET. Part. Pres. taisaut Part. Past, tu, m. ; tue,/. INTX \ Pres. j~ Je tais, nous taisons, tu tais, vous taisez, il tait ; ils taisent. Imp. Je taisais, nous taisions, tu taisais, vous taisiez, il taisait ; ils taisaient. Fret. Je tus, nous tumes, tu tus, vous tutes, il tut ; ils turent. Fut. Je tairai, nous tairons, tu tairas, vous tairez, il taira ; ils tairont. COND. \ Pres. ) Je tairais, nous tairions, tu tairais, vous tairiez, il tairait ; ils tairaient. IMPER. taisons, tais, taisez, qu'il taise ; qu'ils taisent. OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 171 SUBJ. > je taise, tu taises, il taise ; Prcs. ) O'nous taisions, vous taisiez, ilstaiscnt. Imp. g je tussc, _ tu tusses, il tut ; O'nous tussions, vous tussicz, ils tusscnt. Conjugate in the same manner, se taire, to be silent, to hold one's tongue. EXERCISE CX. An ass-driver said: I am not what I follow, for if I were dnier m. ce que car etais what I follow, I would not be what I am. Trouble art. embarras m. attends riches. Several princes of Germany suivre art. richesses f. pi. Allemagne follow the doctrine of Luther. I shall follow you very f. de fort closely. Always follow the advice of your father. prcs. 3 x avism. monsieur Letus pursue our journey. Well! what (is the consequence)? chemin m. Eh bien! que s'ensuivre I shall not conceal from you my way of thinking 1 . After * facon f. inf-1 having said that, he held his tongue. Let us be silent mf-1 331. TRAIRE, TO MILK. Part. Prcs. tray ant. Part. Past, trait, m. ; traite,/. JND. | Je trais, tu trais, il trait ; Pres. \ nous trayons, vous trayez, ils traient. Imp. Je trayais, tu trayais, il tray ait ; nous trayions, vous trayiez, ils trayaient. (No Preterite Definite.) Fut. Je trairai, tu trairas, il traira ; nous trairons, vous trairez, ils trairont. COND. ) Je trairais, tu trairais, il trairait ; Pres. \ nous trairions, vous trairiez, ils trairaient. IMPER. trais, qu'il traie ; trayons, trayez, qu'ils traient. SUBJ. ) je traie, tu traies, il traie ; Pres. ) O'nous trayions, vous trayiez, ils traient. (A'o Imperfect of the Sutgunctivc.) 332. Conjugate in the same manner: Abstraire, to abstract. distmirc, to distract, to divert. extraire, to extract. rentraire, tofinedraw, to darn. retraire, to redeem. soustruirc, to aubtract. ( 8ee Kcmarks on Abstraire and AUraire, p. 14C.) 172 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS 333. VAINCRE, TO VANQUISH, TO CONQUER. Part. Pres. vainquant. Part. Past, vaincti. IND. ) Je vaincs, Pres. ) nous vainquons, Imp. Je vainquais, nous vainquions, Pret. Je vainquis, nous vamquimes, Je vaincrai, nous vaincrons, Je vaincrais, nous vaincrions, tu vaincs, vous vainquez, tu vainquais, vous vainquiez, tu vainquis, il vainc ; ils vainquent. il vainquait; ils vainquaient. il vainquit ; Fut. COND. Pres. IMP EH. vous vamqultes, ils vainquirent. tu vaincras, il vaincra ; vous vaincrez, ils vaincront. tu vaincrais, il vaincrait ; vous vaincriez, ils vaincraient. (The 2dpers. s. is not in use.) qu'il vainque ; vainquons, vainquez, qu'ils vainquent. SUBJ. ) g je vainque, tu vainques, il vainque ; Pres. jO'nous vainquions, vous vainquiez, ils vainquent. Imp. gje vainquisse, tu vainquisses, il vainquit; O"nou8 yainquissions, vous vainquissiez, ils vainquissent. The Present and Imperfect of the Indicative of this verb are seldom used. Convaincre, to convince, to convict, is conjugated in the same manner. EXERCISE CXI. Is the cow milked f vache f. The least thing 1 diverts his moindre le * attention. He has extracted that passage from a dialogue of * m. ru. Plato. Arithmetic teaches to add, Platan. art. arithmetique f. a additionner, subtract, multiply, and divide. Scipio vanquished pr. pr. multiplier, pr. diviser. Scipion ind-3 Hannibal at the battle of Zama, in Africa. The Greeks Annibal Afrique. Grec vanquished the Persians at Marathon, Salamis, ind-3 Perse a pr. Salamine, Platea, and Mycale. How many people cannot be pr. Platee, pr. Combien de gens nepeuvent convinced but by experience ! He was convicted of treason, m. pi. que art. OF THE KOUttTII CONJUGATION. 173 LVD. > Pres. f Je vis, nous vivons, Imp. Je vivais, nous vivious, Fret. Je vecus, nous v^cumes, Put. Je vivrai, nous vivrons, COXD. ) Pres. ] Je vivrais, nous vivrions, lilPER. vivons, SUBJ. ) gje vive, Pres. jo'iious vivions, Imp. gje vecusse, O'nous vecussions, 334. VI7RE, TO LIVE. Part. Pres. vivant. Part. Past, vecu. No feminine. tu vis, il vit ; vous vivez, ils vivent. tu vivais, il vivait ; vous viviez, ils vivaient. tu vecus, il vecut ; vous vecutes, ils vecurent. tu vivras, ilviyra; vous vivrez, ils vivront. tu vivrais, il vivrait ; vous vivriez, ils vivraient. vis, qu'il vive ; vivez, qu'ils vivent. tu vives, U vive ; vous viviez, ils vivent. tu vecusses, il ve"cut ; vous vcussiez, ils ve"cussent. So are conjugated, revivre, to revive ; and survivre, to survive. Ils ont vecu, in the sense of ils sont marts (they are dead), is an ex- pression purely Latin : the Romans avoided, from superstition, the use of words reckoned inauspicious. We say more generally, ils sont marts ; however, ils ont vecu has become a French phrase, owing to its adoption by a great number of authors ; besides, it produces a finer effect than the expression for which it stands. 335. To live on or upon, is expressed, by vivre DE ; as, 77 vit DE legumes (AcAD.), he lives upon vegetables. C'est une fille accoutumt'e a vivre DE salade, DE lait, DE fromage ct DE pommes. (J/o/iere.) VIVE If Hoi ! is an exclamation to express that we wi.sh the king long life and prosperity. Vive is also a term made use of to mark that we highly esteem a person, or set a great value upon something. Vive la liberte ! Vivent nos liburateurs ! (Acad.~) Malgre" tons les chagrins, vive la vie! (Cresset.) Vivent les gens d'esprit! (Palissot.) Vicent les gens qui ont de 1'industrie ! (FlucJte.) Vive or vivent, in the above and similar phrases, is the third person of the present of the Subjunctive of the verb vivre. (Ac AD., Fe'raud, Tre'ioux, etc.) 1 74 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS EXERCISE CXIL I Wee with economy. He lives like a great lord. She en * seigneur. lives upon her income. We live in the country Those rentes f. pi. a animals live upon herbs and roots. Saint Louis (Louis herbef. pr. racinef. IX.) lived in the thirteenth century. So good a prince will ind-2 a sieclem. . i live for ever in history It is dear living in this eternellement dans art. fait inf-1 dans town. The people shouted, Long live the Emperor ! peuple m. crier ind-3 Fathers live again in their cluldren. He will never art. revivre dans survive the loss of his reputation. The husband has d, perte f. survived his wife. -, He did not long 1 survive a person who a ind-3 a f. was so dear to him. Let us live as good Christians. ind-2 86 en EXERCISE CXIII. He was in great dejection of mind; but the news ind-2 un accablement m. which he has just received, have revived him. Homer vient de inf-1 fait inf-1 Homere lived probably about eight hundred and fifty years before ind-2 environ * avant the Christian era That man lives on little He lives from 2 J peu. au hand to mouth. She lives on bread and water. They live at jour le jour. d' the expense of others. She lived more than a hundred years. depens pi. 115 ind-4 The Latin tongue will live for ever. Long live Champagne 2 * toujours. and Burgundy for good wines. They called out to him, Who crier goes there? he replied, France. This work will live. vivre OF THE ADVERB. 175 CHAPTER VI. OF THE ADVERB. 336. The Adverb is an invariable word, so called, because it is most frequently added to a verb, to express some quality, manner, or circumstance ; as, il ecrit BIEN, he writes well; die park DISTINCTEMENT, she speaks distinctly. The adverb serves also to modify an adjective, and even another adverb ; as, il est TRES eloquent, he is very eloquent ; elle chante FORT bien, she sings very well. Some adverbs consist of a single word, as bien, well ; toujours, always ; others are compound, and consist of two or more words, and are commonly called, adverbial expressions; such are, pele-mele, promiscuously; sur-le- champ, immediately ; tout-a-coup, suddenly. 337. PLACE OF THE ADVERB. Adverbs, in French, are generally placed after the verb, in simple tenses, and between the auxiliary and the participle, in compound tenses ; as, II parle souvent de vous. II a souvent parle" de vous. He often speaks of you. He has often spoken of you. But adverbial expressions are placed after the participle in compound tenses ; as, Vous avez juge a la hate. \ You have judged hastily. 338. CLASSIFICATION OF ADVERBS. Adverbs may be classified according to their different uses ; we shall give a list of those most in use. 339. Adverbs of Affirmation and Consent. Certes, certainly. soit, be it so. <>iii, yes. volontiers, willingly. sans doute, undoubtedly. \ d'accord, done, agreed. 176 EXERCISE ON ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION, ETC. 340. Adverbs of Denial. Non, ne, ne pas, \ . nullement, by no means. ne point, J point du tout, not at all. 341. Adverbs of Doubt. Pcut-etre, perhaps. \ probablement, probably. EXERCISE CXIV. That is undoubtedly a very fine action. You wish it: be it C'est la f. so. I willingly consent to that bargain. No, no, I shall not marche m. consent to it. Will you give up your rights to him ? By no 109 ceder droit m. means. Do you fear his resentment? No, not at all ressentiment m. You perhaps think that he is one of your friends; you are in a croire * mistake. He will probably succeed in his undertaking 1 , art. erreurf. reussir 342. Adverbs of Interrogation. jO- These adverba are always placed before the verb. Combien, how much, how comment, how. [many. oii, where. d'od, whence. pourquoi, why. quand, when. 343. Adverbs of Quantity. Assez, enough. beaucoup, much, very much. bien, fort, tres, very. davantage, more. peu, little. presque, almost. tant, so much, so many. trop, too, too much, too [many. EXERCISE CXV. How much have you got in your purse ? How many verbs have you learned ? How is he ? Where do you deverbem. se porter live? Whence do you come? Why do you make so much d(meurer faire noise ? When shall I have the pleasure of seeing you de inf-l EXERCISE ON ADVERBS OP COMPARISON. 177 again? You have played enough Gentlemen, where are you jouer monsieur running to? I am very glad to meet you. Science is courir * de art. f. estimable, but virtue is much more so. Almost all the art. I' lien * philosophers think so. He has so many friends ! He ainsi. d' drinks too much. She speaks much and reflects little. 344. Adverls of Comparison. Ainsi, thus, so. aussi, as, too, also. autant, as much, as many. comme, as, like. mieux, better. [better. de niieux en mieux, better and moins, less. pis, worse. plus, more si. so. EXERCISE CXVI. The president spoke thus. That book has merit ; but president du there are others as good If he has done that, I can do en * d' en aa much. There were as many ladies as gentlemen. ind-2 de que de monsieur Don't read like him. Women speak better than they art. qu' write. She sings better and belter. Since the invention of n' Depuis f. powder, battles are less bloody than they were. art. poudre f. art. sanglant qu' ne I' ind-2 His affairs are going from bad to worse. You do not offer Imal en enough, give something more. I was so far from them ! de iud-2 loin 86 345. Adverls of Order, or Rank. Premierement, first. secondement, &c. secondly, ftc. d'abord, at first, first. aprcis, after. cnsuite, afterwards. auparavant, before. 178 EXERCISE ON ADVERBS OF ORDER, AND PLACE. 346. Adverbs of Place. Ailleurs, elsewhere. ici, here. la, there. loin, far. partout, everywhere. y, there. REMARK Y adverb comes from the Latin ibi, there; it must not be confounded with the relative pronoun Y, which has the sense of to him, to her, to it, to them, &c. See No. 109. EXERCISE CXVII. Do first what we have agreed upon. Work first, you ce dont 252 * dabord will amuse yourself afterwards. You will go before, and he devant lui after The painter had brought together in the same picture ind-2 r assembler un tableau m. several different objects ; there a troop of bacchants, here a 1 bacchante group of young people ; there a sacrifice ; here a disputation of gens m. dispute f. philosophers. Alexander gave to Porus a kingdom larger Alexandre ind-3 plus grand than the one he had before. Don't go far. I have celui qu' ind-2 looked for it everywhere. Will you go there after dinner ? chercher Vouloir y 347. Adverbs of Time, Present. Aujourd'hui, to-day. \ maintenant, now. Past. Autrefois, formerly. hier, yesterday, [terday. dernieremeut, lately. avant-hier, the day before yes- Future. Demain, to-morrow. aprds-demain, the day after to-morrow. bientot, soon, very soon. desormais, hereafter. dore"navant, henceforth. Indeterminate. Alors, then. longtemps, long. iSj sometimes rarement, seldom. souvent, often. toujours, always EXERCISE OX ADVERBS OF TIME. 179 EXERCISE CXVIII. We expect him to-day or to-morrow. Formerly, the attendre education of females was neglected, but now it is very much art. femme ind-2 neglige on* a beaucoup (attended to) He set out the day before yesterday. Let us Vera 'occupe est parti be wiser hereafter. Be more exact henceforth Where were 3 ind-2 you then ? He goes sometimes on foot, sometimes in a coach. d en * voiture. That seldom occurs. People often deceive themselves by arriver On se tromper en judging from appearances. The wisest kings are often sur art. apparencef. deceived. The moon always revolves round the earth. tromper tourner autour de 348. Adverbs of Manner and Quality. Bien, well. mal, badly, ill. ii la hate, hastily. a la mode, fashionably. a tort, wrongfully. expres, on purpose. To this class must be added the adverbs formed from adjectives, by annexing ment. There are, in French, few adjectives, from which adverbs of this nature have not been formed. This termination in ment corresponds to the ly of the English, and comes from the Italian sub- stantive mente, itself derived from the Latin substantive mens, mentis, which signifies mine?, intention, manner; so that tendrement, fortement, have the same meaning as "in a tender manner," "in a strong manner." These adverbs arc formed from adjectives in the fol- lowing manner : 349. RULE I. When the adjective ends with a vowel, in the masculine, the adverb is formed by simply adding ment to it ; as, poll, polite; poliment, politely. sage, wise; sagement, wisely. rrni, true; vraiment, truly. 180 Exception. Impuni, unpunished, makes impunement, with impunity. The six following adverbs take an e accented before the termination ment, instead of the e mute of the adjectives : Aveuglement, blindly. commod^ment, cominodiously . conforme'inent, conformably. ^norme'ment, enormously. incommode'ment, incommodiously. opiniatre'ment, obstinately. Bellement, softly ; folUment, foolishly ; mollement, effeminately ; and nouvellement, newly, are formed from the adjectives, bel, fol, mol, nouvel, according to the following rule. 350. RULE II. When the adjective ends with a con- sonant, in the masculine, the adverb is formed from the feminine, by adding ment to it ; as, franc, m. franche, /. frank ; franchement, frankly. heureux, m. heureuse,/. happy; heureusement, happily. naif, m. naive,/. artless; naivement, artlessly. Exception. Gentil, makes yentiment, prettily. The six following adverbs take an e accented, instead of the e mute of the feminine of the adjectives from which they are formed : Communement, commonly. confinement, confusedly. expresse'ment, expressly. obscurement, obscurely. precis^ment, precisely. profondement, profoundly 351. RULE III. Adjectives ending in ant or ent, in the masculine, form their adverbs by changing ant into amment, and ent into emment ; as, constant, constant; constamment, constantly. Eloquent, eloquent; eUoquemment, eloquently. Lent, slow, and present, present, are the only excep- tions to this rule ; they follow the second rule, making lentement, slowly, and presentement, presently. N.B. Most abverbs of manner, and a few of the other classes, have the three degrees of comparison, which are formed as in the adjectives. EXERCISE ON ADVERBS OF MANNER, ETC. 181 352. The following adverbs are irregular in French, as well as in English : Positive. Comparative. Superlative. bicn, well. mieux, better. le mieux, the best. inal, badly. pis, worse. le pis, the worst. peu, little. moins, less. le moins, the least. (See previous Remarks on these Adverbs, No. 70.) EXERCISE CXIX. (A'. B In the two following Exercises, some Adjectives are given, from which the Student will form Adverbs, according to the foregoing rules.) All goes well. I say it on purpose. He has done that aller dire faire very cleverly. He acts conformably to your orders Speak fort habile agir to me frankly. He is dangerously wounded. Corneille and dangereux Racine are the two best French tragic poets ; the pieces of 8 'tragique 1 piece f. the former are strongly, but incorrectly written ; those of the premier 2 fort s ^incorrect * latter are more regularly beautiful, more purely expressed, dernier regulier beau pur exprime and more delicately conceived. You walk too slowly, delicat penst EXERCISE CXX. I want shoes that I can put on easily. He receives vouloir 32 subj-1 * aise 'everybody J (very politely). Read attentively. The lion is tout le monde attentif naturally courageous. The ancients believed that the swan naturel ancicn ind-2 cygnem. sang: melodiously, when it was about to die We see evidently ind-2 melodieux lorsqu' ind-2 pres de Evident that three times three make nine That affair goes badly fois affaire f. Sit upon this sofa ; you will be better than on that Asseycz-vous m. chair. Of all our great writers, he is the one I like best, chaise f. tcrivain eak is a friend qfmine. 194 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. EXERCISE CXXXV. The diseases of the mind are more difficult to cure thau maladie f. dme f. difficile guerir que those of the body. The empire of Alexander was divided 99 m. ind-3partage among his generals. The Parthenon was in the citadel of entre Parthenonm. iud-2 citadellef. Athens. The city of Rome was founded 753 years before Athenes. villef. a ete fonde an m. Jesus Christ. Fabius was appointed dictator in the war Jesus-Christ. iud-3 nomme dictateur against Hannibal. The Roman empire extended from the Annibal. 3 x s'etendait depuis Western Ocean to the Euphrates. (According to) ^occidental I 0ceanm. jusqu' a, Euphrate. Selon the poets, the car of Venus was drawn by doves. poete m. char m. Venus ind-2 attele de colombe f. EXERCISE CXXXVI. The birth of JESUS CHRIST is the era of the Christians, naissance f. ere f. and the flight of Mahomet is that of the Mahometans, fuite f. 99 mahometan commonly called the hegira. The first year of *ordinairement ^appelee hegire h mu. annee f. the hegira corresponds to the year 622 of JESUS CHRIST. repond In the time of Philip the Fairf, there were only the dukes, De Philippe-le-Bel, il riy avait que due the counts, and the barons whose ladies had the comte dont art.femme eussent right to (treat themselves) with four gowns a year. droit m. de se donner robe f. par an. The invention of the barometer is due to Pascal. f. barometrem. t Ascended the throne ir.li'.-.">; oied in 114 SYNTAX OF THE AKTICLE. 195 373. RULE III. The article is used, in French, before the names of arts, sciences, virtues, vices, metals ; and also before adjectives, infinitives, adverbs, prepositions, and conjunctions, used substantively ; as, L'ivrognerie est un vice affreux. LE vert plait aux yeux. LE savoir a son prix. Drunkenness is a dreadful vice. Green pleases the eye. Knowledge has its value. 374. N.B. Adjectives, verbs, adverbs, etc. used sub- stautively, are masculine in French. EXERCISE CXXXVII. Before studying navigation andfortification (it is necessary to) Avant d' etudier - f. - pi. ilfaut know mathematics. Grammar teaches to speak correctly, 205 mathematiquesi>\. apprendred, corrcctement rhetoric to speak elegantly. Chronology 0x1$. geography rhetoriquef. elegamment. chronologic f. geographic?. are the eyes of history. Faith, hope, and. charity are yeux art. foi f. esperance f. des cardinal virtues. Intemperance and idleness are the two 3 theologale * paresse f. most dangerous enemies of life. The principal rnetals are : plus ennemim. art. f. i/iit'l, silver, copper, tin, iron, and lead. He or in. argent m. cuivre m. etainm.ferm. plombm. knows Latin and French She (is fond of ) blue. Eating, savoir aime bleu. manger drinking, and sleeping, are necessary to man. boire dormir art. 375. RULE IV. The article is put before the names of countries, provinces, islands, mountains, rivers, and winds ; but countries having the same name as their capitals do not take the article ; as, L'Anglctcrre et I.A France sent tlrux (-tats puissants. Naples est un pays delicieux. England and France are ttco powerful states. Naples is a delightful country. 196 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. EXERCISE CXXXVHI. Europe contains the following states: on the north, contenir 2 suivant *etat m. d nord m. Norway, Sweden, Denmark, Russia, and the British Norwegef. Suedet Danemarkm. Russief. "Britanniques Islands; in the middle, France, Belgium, Holland, l iles a milieu m. f. Belgique f. Hollande f. Germany or the (German States), Prussia, Poland, Allemagne f. * Confederation germanique, Prusse f . Pologne f . Hungary, Austria, and Switzerland; on the south, IIongrief.h&STp. Autrichef. Suisse(. d midim. Spain, Portugal, Italy, Greece, and Turkey in Europe. Espagnef. m. Itahei. Grecef. Turquief. d' Lapland is the country of the reindeer. Burgundy Laponie f. patrie f. renne m. Bourgogne f. produces excellent wine. Sicily is the granary of Italy, produire d' Sidle f. grenier m. EXERCISE CXXXIX. France is separated from Italy by the Alps, and from separe Alpes f. pi. Spain by the Pyrenees. The principal rivers of Europe Pyrenees f. pi. riviere f. are : the Volga, the Dnieper or Boristhenes, the Don or m. Dnieper m. Borysthenes m. Tanais, in Russia; the Danube, the Rhine, and the Elbe, en m. Rhinm. m. in Germany ; the Vistula, in Poland ; the Loire, the Seine, Vistulef. f. f. the Rhone, and the Garonne, in France ; the Ebro, the Rhone m. f. Ebrem. Tagus, andMeDouro, in Spain; thePo, and the Tiber, Tage in. m. Pu m. Tibre m. in Italy; *7*e Thames, Me Mersey, and Me Severn, in England; 2'amisef. i'. Savernef. and the Shannon, in Ireland. The first pheasants came in. Irlande. faisanm.sontvenits from the banks of the Phasis, a river of Colchis, bord m. Phase m. * Jleuvem. ColchideL SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 197 EXCEPTIONS AND REMARKS. 376. (1.) The article is not used before the names of countries when they are preceded by the preposition en ; as, Demeurer en Angleterre, to live in England; Aller eu Allemayne, to go to Germany. "With the names of towns, the preposition a, and not en, is used ; as, Demeurer a Londres, to live in London / Etre & Paris, to be in Paris. 377. (2.) When the names of countries are governed by some preceding noun, and have the meaning of an adjective, they are used without the article; as, roi d Espagne, king of Spain; vins de France, French wines ; laine d' Angleterre, English wool. 378. (3.) The article is not used Avhen we speak of countries as of places one comes or sets out from ; as, II vient d' Italic, he comes from Italy ; f arrive de France, I am just arrived from France. In this case, however, we use the article before the names of the five great divisions of the world ; as, je viens de VAsic, il arrive de I'Ame'rique. 379. (4.) Most names of countries out of Europe, keep the article ; therefore, instead of the prepositions en and tie, used alone, as in the preceding cases, we employ the prepositions d and de, Avitli the article ; thus we say, je vais au Japan (and not en Japon), I am going to Japan ; f arrive du Canada (and not de Canada), I am just arrived from Canada. EXERCISE CXL. In Norway, they cover the houses with the bark of the En on couvrir accc ecorcef. birch-tree. Wo intend going to Switzerland and bouleau in. se proposer d' inf-1 en Italy . Three English miles are a little more than 3 d'Anglelerrc ^millem. font plus d' one French league. My brother will soon return from *de France l lieuef. revcnir Russia. I sailed from Holland for the Cape of partir uid-3 cap m. 198 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. Good Hope. We had set out from Africa, when he Bonne-Esperance. iud-2 partir arrived there. He is gone to China. Chocolate was ind-3 y aller Chine f. chocolat m. ind-3 brought from Mexico to Europe by the Spaniards. apporter Mexique m. en Espagnol 380. RULE V. Nouns used in a partitive sense, that is, denoting only a part of anything, which is marked in English by the words some or any, sometimes expressed and oftener understood, must be preceded in French by du, de la, de I', des, according to the gender and number of the noun. EXAMPLES. Donnez-moi du pain, de la viande, et des habits. A-t-il de Z 1 argent ou des amis? Give me some bread, meat, and clothes. Has he any money or any friends f 381. Exception. When a noun in the partitive sense is preceded by an adjective, instead of du, de la, de l' t des, the preposition de only is used ; as, Donnez-moi de bon pain, de bonne I Give me some good bread, good viande, et de bons habits. meat, and good clothes. (For farther explanations, see No. 32, and the Remarks, p. 63.) In these expressions : des petits pois, des petites raves, des petitS'pdtes, des petits-maitres, des jeunes gens, etc., the substantives are so united with the adjectives, as to form but one and the same word, and take the article according to Rule V. We likewise say: I' opinion DES anciens philosopher; la suite DES grandes passions ; le propre DES belles actions, etc., because, in expressions of this kind, the nouns are not used in a partitive but in a general sense. EXERCISE CXLI. I have bought some books. Have you any change ? monnaie f. Provence and Languedoc produce oranges, olives, almonds, f. m. produire f. f. amande f. SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 199 chesnuts, figs, peaches, apricots, and grapes. He asks chdtaignc,f.jigucf.]iechef. abricotm. ratsinm. for red vine. To write well, one must have good paper, good * > Pour 2 x il faut * ink, and good pens A great heart, said a king of Persia, cncref. cceurm. ind-2 Perse receives little presents with one hand, and makes large ones d' en faire grand * with the other (He is always seen) with wits or de On le voit toujours beaux-esprits great lords. Have you any green peas? grands-seigneurs. petits pois 382. RULE VI. The English make use of the indefinite article a or an, before nouns of measure, weight, and number ; but the French use the article le, la ; as, Un schelling L'aune. | A shilling a yard. Six sous LA livre. Six-pence a pound. Cinq schcllings LE cent. Five shillings a hundred. o83. But, in speaking of time, a or an is expressed in French by par ; as, so much a-week, tant PAR semaine. A-licad, is rendered by par lite ; BO much each, (ant par pertonne; so much R lesson, tant par Ufon. EXERCISE CXLII. Corn sells at seven shillings a bushel. The best art. blem. se vend * boisseaum. French wines sell for five shillings a bottle. That ^de France * se vcndent * bouteillef. prrocer, sells sugar at three pounds a hundred-weight, epicicrm. vend art. * livres sterling quintal m. coffee at two shillings a pound, and pepper at two-pence art. * livre f. art. poivre m. * an ounce. How much a dozen? (Here are) excellent once f. douzaine f. Void ovsters at one shilling a hundred. He gives him a hundred nuttre f. * pounds a year ; it is more than eight pounds a month. livres sterling e* de 200 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 384. RULE VII. When the article is used before the first of a series of nouns, it must be repeated before each 5 as, Je vis hier le roi, Li reine, et les I saw the king, queen, and princes, princes. yesterday. So you will not say : les officiers et soldats ; le pere et me~re ; les freres et soeurs ; but you will say : les officiers et les soldats ; le pere et, la mere ; les freres et les soeurs. Note This rule applies to the prepositions a and de, and to nil the words which hold the place of the article. We must therefore say: J'ai parK, a la reine et a fa princesse, I have spoken to the queen and the princess. Sun pere et sa mere, his father and mother. EXERCISE CXLIII. The gentleman and lady are gone. Gold, silver, monsieur dame partis, art. health, honours, and pleasures, cannot make a man happy, santef. ne peuvent rendre I' without virtue. Self-love and pride are art. art. amour-propre m. orgueil m. always the offspring of a weak mind. Innocence of partage m. 2 faible ^esprit m. art. f. manners, sincerity, and abhorrence of vice art. mceurs pi. horreur h mu. art. m. inhabit this happy region. Poetry painting, and music habiter region f. art. poesief. peinturef. musiquef. are (sister arts). The love for one's father and mother is soeurs. amour m. son the basis of every virtue. The city of Andrew and Peter basef. tout art. pi. villef. 385. EULE VIII. When two adjectives are united by the conjunction et (and), and one of them is intended to qualify a substantive expressed and the other a substan- tive understood, the article must be repeated, in French, before each adjective ; as, L'histoire ancienne et LA moderne. Le premier et LE second etage. Les philosophes anciens et LES mo- dernes. Ancient and modern history. The first and the second floor. Ancient and modern philosophers. SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 201 There are two histories, two floors, philosophers both ancient and modern ; the one expressed, the other under- stood ; therefore the article must be repeated. H3- Observe that the substantive U not put in the plural : fhistoire andenne ct la moderne, le premier et It second ktage, because these phrases are elliptical, and stand for fhistoire andenne ct fhistoire moderne, le premier itage et le second itage. 386. But, when the adjectives united by et (and), qua- lify only one substantive, and no other is understood, the article is not repeated; so we say with the modern grammarians: Le sage et pieux Fenelon, the wise and pious Fcnelon ; and with Boileau : Le doux et tendie ouvrage (The sweet and tender workj because it is the same person that is wise and pious, and the same work which is sweet and tender. Ao/I.C-J of three years, laden with gold, silver, ivory, precious charge de ivoirem. 2 stones, and other kinds of merchandise. I will pay you in espece f. marchandises. en gold He lived and died like a philosopher. Come, tivre ind-3 ind-3 Allans, children, work That kind of work does not please genre m. ouvrage plaire everybody. History of the Roman emperors, a taut le monde. 2 1 392. RULE II. No article is used before proper names of deities, persons, animals, towns, and particular places. EXAMPLES. Dieu est tout-puissant. Jupiter ct V6nus (Staient dcs divi- nites paiennes. Kdimbourg est une belle ville. God is all-powerful, Jupiter and Venus were heathen divinities. Edinburgh is a fine city. Some proper names of towns and particular places always keep the article as an Inseparable part of the name; as, La Rodielle, La Fteche, la //aye, le Caire, la Jtfecque, &c. 393. Proper names, however, take the article, when used in a particular sense, or to denote an individual dis- tinction ; as, Le Dieu des Chretiens. Le Jupiter d'Homere. La Venus de Me*dicis. The God of the Christians. Hornet's Jupiter. The Venus de' Medici. 394. Observation. In imitation of the Italians, the French use the article before the names of several cele- brated Italian poets and painters, the word poete or peintre, being then understood ; as, le Dante, le Tasse, I'Arioste, le Titien, le Guide. However, we say Petrarque, Bocace, Michel-Anyc, Raphael, etc. ; it is usage that de- cides here, as in many other cases. EXERCISE CXLVI. God said . let there be light, and there was light. The ind-3 que la lumiere soit, * 2 ind-3 x God of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, was the only true God. ind-2 seul vrai Plato, Aristotle, Homer, Demosthenes, Cicero, Virgil, and Platon, Aristote, Demosthene, Ciceron, Virgile, 204 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. Livy, are classical authors. Achilles is the hero Tite-Ltve, des 2 classique 1 Achille heros h asp. of the Iliad ; JEneas is the hero of the Eneid. Helen was Iliadef. Enee Eneidef. Helene ind-4 the ruin of Troy. Bucephalus (would carry none but) Alex- Troie. Bucephale ne voulait porter qu' ander. Carthage was the rival of Home. Dante, Tasso, ind-2 rivalef. and Ariosto, hold the first rank among the Italian poets. tenir rang m. parmi a 395. RULE III. The article is not used, in French, before the ordinal numbers first, second, third, fourth, etc., when they come after the name of a sovereign, or after the words book, cliapter, or such like as, Edouard premier. Richard trois. Livre premier. Chapitre second. Edward the irst. Richard the third. Book the fast. Chapter the second. 396. Observe that, in French, we make use of the cardinal numbers instead of the ordinal, in speaking of sovereigns, with the exception of the first of the series. With the second, it is optional to use deux or second, for we say indifferently Henri deux or Henri second. (Acad.) 397. The cardinal or ordinal numbers are indifferently used, the first excepted, after the words livre, chapitre, page, or such like. We say, livre premier, section premiere, and not livre un, section une. But we say either livre huit or huitieme ; chapitre dix or dixieme ; page trois or troisieme ; tome second or tome deux, etc. (Acad.] (For farther Remarks, see pages 34, 35.) EXERCISE CXLVII. Pope Leo the tenth and Luther were cotemporaries art. pape Leon contemporain William the third married the princess Marir, daughter Guillaume epouser ind-3 Marie of James the second, and granddaughter of Charles the first. Jacques petite-fille SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 205 Louis the eleventh had a Scotch guard. Louis the fifteenth ind-2 3 ecossais l garde f. was the great grandson of Louis the fourteenth. Book the iiid-2 arriere-petit-fils sixth, chapter the fifth. Volume the third, section the seventh, article the first. Rule the fourth, page the ninth. regie f . 398. RULE IV. No article is used before nouns pre- ceded by any of the possessive, demonstrative, or inde- finite adjectives won, ton, son, notre, votre, leur, ce, nul, aucun, chaque, tout (used for chaque), certain, plusieurs, tel, nor before those which are preceded by a cardinal number; as, Man fix-re et ma soeur apprennent la geographic. C'elte montre est bonne ; donnez-la a votre soiur. Tout liomme peut mentir, mais tout horntne ne nient pas. J'ai trois chevaux. My brother and sister are learniny geography. This watch is good ; give it to your sister. Every man can lie, but every man does not lie. I have three horses. (Sec Observations, pp. 42, 43, and Rule, p. 44.) EXERCISE CXLVII1. It is my turn to speak Give me the number of his C' a tourm.ct numerom. house. The Seine has its source in Burgundy, and its f. f. en mouth at Havre-de-Grace. All the husbands were at embouchure f. au mari ind-2 the hall with their wives These ladies (are waiting for) bal m. femme dame attendent their carriages. Those two boys have lost thtir hats. voilure f. The Saracens occupied Spain during several centuries. Sarrasins out occupe pendant siecle m. The city of Troy sustained a siege of ten years. villc f Troie soutint an m. The pound sterling (is worth) about ticenly-fivc franco. vaut environ 206 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 399. RULE V. The indefinite article, a or an, used in English, before nouns expressing title, profession, trade, country, or any attribute of the 7ioun preceding, is omitted in French ; as, Le due d'York, prince du sang. Je suis meMecin. II est libraire. Etes-vous Francais ? Je viens de Caen, ville de Nor- mandie. The Duke of York, a prince of the blood. I am a physician. He is a bookseller. Are you a Frenchman? I come from Caen, a town of Nor- mandy. 400. But when an adjective is joined to the noun, or when it is specified by some circumstance, then a or an must be expressed in French ; as, Je suis UN prince infortune'. M. Walewski est UN Polonais d'une illustre maison. I am an unfortunate prince. M. Walewski is a Pole of an illus- trious family. A or an is also expressed in French after c'est ; as, C'est UN e've'que. | He is a bishop. 401. RULE VI. The English indefinite article a or an is omitted in French, after quel, quclle, what, used as an exclamation ; as, Quel malheur! Quelle beaute" ! Quelle belle maison ! Quelle folie d'agir ainsi ! What a misfortune I What a beauty! What a beautiful house ! What & folly to act thus ! EXERCISE CXLIX. Napoleon was (at once) an emperor, a warrior, and a hid-2 alafois guerrier, statesman. Socrates was a philosopher; Apelles, a homme d'etat. Socrate ind-2 Apelle painter; Phidias, a sculptor; Cicero, an orator; ^ivy? o.n peintre Tite-Live historian ; and Virgil, a poet. His father was a barrister. historien poete. ind-2 avocat. I am an Englishman, and a merchant. The best coffee negotiant. cafe m. comes from Mocha, a town of Arabia Felix. I am an Moka, heureuse. SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 207 unhappy Spaniard, who seek an asylum, where I may malhcureux Espagnol, cherche asile in. oil puisse end ray days in peace He is an officer He is a captain. finir en C' officier. II What a noise you make! bntitm. Wliat a beautiful morning 1 ! matinee f. 402. RULE VII. No article is used, but only the pre- position de, after the following adverbs : less, fewer. nt, no. little, few. more, nothing. so much, so many too much, too many. assez, enough. moin autant, as much, as many. pas o beaucoup, much, very much, peu, many. plus, combieu, how much, how rien, que, many. tant, jainais, never. trop, EXAMPLES. Beaucoup DE nations. Plus u'cffets et moins DE paroles. Trop DE peine. Many nations. More deeds and fewer words. Too much trouble. Bien, in the sense of beaucoup, is the only adverb of quantity which, besides the preposition de, requires the article ; as, Elle a bien DE i/esprit. II a bien DES amis. She has a great deal of wit. He has many friends. But, should the substantive that comes after the ad- verb be particularized by what follows, it requires the article ; as, J'ai encore beaucoup DE L'argent que j'ai apporte de France. / have still a yood deal of the money which I brought from France. EXERCISE CL. I have enough money. The elephant has much intelligence. elephant f. For one Plato in opulence, how many Homers and JEsop9 dans f. Homereslimu. Esopes in indigence ! The honest man is esteemed, even by those dans f. honnele csfimi de 208 SYNTAX OF THE AUTICLE. who have no probity. There is no church (that can be) pas II riyapoint eglise qu'onpuisse compared to Saint Peter's of Rome. He has few friends. inf-1 * Mothers have often too much indulgence for their children. 371 f. Study presents so many advantages that one cannot 371 etude f. offrir avantage m. on ne saurait (give himself up to it) with too much ardour. s'y livrer 403. RULE VIII. No article is used before nouns joined to verbs with which they express but one idea, and form idiomatical expressions ; as, Ajouter foi, to give credit. Avoir besom, to want, to be in need of. carte blanche, to have full power. chaud, to be warm. froid, to be cold. compassion, to commiserate. dessein, to intend. envie, to wish. faim, to be hungry. soif, to be thirsty. honte, to be ashamed. patience, to have patience. peur, to be afraid. pitie, to pity. raison, to be in the right. tort, to be in the wrong. soin, to take care. Donner carte blanche, to give full power. Faire attention, to attend, to mind. peur, to frighten. Faire plaisir, to do a favour. semblant, to pretend, to tort, to wrong. [ft-ign. voile, to set sail. Mettre fin, to put an end. Parler allemand, to speak Ger- man. anglais, to speak English. francais, to speak French. Porter bonheur, to bring good luck. malheur, to bring bad luck. envie, to bear envy. Prendre courage, to take cou- rage, to cheer up. garde, to take care. jour, to appoint a day. patience, to take patience, to bear or wait patiently. -^ plaisir, to delight. racine, to take root. Rendre visite, to pay a visit. Tenir tete, to cope with one, to oppose. 404. REMARK. The article is sometimes omitted before substantives, in order to render the language more striking and expressive. When we say, Pauvrete n'est pas vice ; Contentement passe richcsse, we ex- press ourselves with more life than if we were to say, Lapauvrete nest SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 209 I at un vice ; Le contentement passe la ricfiesse. See also this phrase of FLCHIER: Citoyens, Strangers, ennemis, peupks, row, empereurs, le plaignent et h r&verent. I* has much more liveliness, energy, and grace, than it would have by re-establishing the articles : Les citoyens, les Strangers, etc., le plaignent et le reverent. EXERCISE CLI. 1 want a hat. We intend to travel We must always d' de II faut pity the unfortunate. I (do not know) who is in the wrong. de malheureu-x pi. ne sais qui The king has given full power to that general. That man general. pretends to sleep. The night put an end to the battle. de ind-3 combat m. Take care of yourself. He will come in a moment, have Pr entire d vous. iiid-7 dans prendre patience. Towers, spires, trees, flocks, huts, houses, Tour f. clocher m. troupeau m. cabane f. palaces, everything was swallowed up by the waves of the sea. tout iiid-3 englouti flotw. mert EXERCISE CLII. You are wrong, it is he who is right. The fox sometimes c' lui feigns to be dead Speak French to us. She speaks Italian, d' Spanish, German, and English Let us say no ill of Boileau, espagnol, de mal baid Voltaire, that brings bad luck. My vine wants cutting. cela d'etre taillee. Are you coldf I am neither cold nor warm. Are you hungry, ni my boy ? No, but I am very thirsty. Mind what he says to mais d you We must not wrong our neighbour. The service that II dson prochain. m. I have rendered him seems to have brought me good luck. sembler * Vice cannot take root in a heart like his. art. ru. ne saurait comme 94 210 SYNTAX OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. CHAPTER II. OF THE SUBSTANTIVE OR NOUN. I. FUNCTIONS OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 405. The Substantive is either the subject of the verb, or is governed by the verb, in which case it is called the regimen. In this phrase : la mere aime ses enfants, the mother loves her children ; la mere is the subject, or nominative case ; and enfants is the regimen, object, or accusative case. Ses enfants is also called the regimen direct, be- cause there is no preposition intervening between it and the verb aime. In Us enfants obeissent a la mere, the children obey the mother ; les enfants is the subject, and a la mere is the regimen ; and this regimen is called indirect because it has a preposition (a) before it. II. OF THE GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 406. We have already said (p. 11) that there are in French only two genders, the masculine and the feminine. The masculine gender expresses the male kind, and the feminine gender denotes the female kind. The French language has no neuter; consequently, inanimate objects are either masculine or feminine. 407. Generally speaking, French substantives have but one gender ; a few of them, however, are masculine in one signification, and feminine in another. The following are those most in use : AIGLE (eagle) is feminine in the sense of a standard, an ensign in war: Vaigle KOMAINE, Valgle IMPERIALS. In every other sense it is masculine: Aiglevont,} aigle ROYAL; I'aire D'UN aigle. C'est UN aigle, in speaking of a man of genius, of superior talent. OF THE GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 211 COUPLE is feminine when it means a brace, two of a sort ; as, UNE couple de perdrix ; UNE couple d'ceufs. It is masculine when speaking of a man and wife ; as, Ce fut UN HEUREUX COUple. CREPE, masc. crape ; fern, pancake. ENFANT is masculine, when speaking of a boy : c'est UN ban enfant; and feminine, when it is said of a girl: voila UNE belle enfant. GENS (people) requires all words preceding it and re- lating to it to be in the feminine, and all words following it to be in the masculine : les VIEILLES gens sont SOUP- 90NNEUX ; TOUTES les ME"ciiANTES gens. However, in- stead of toutes, tous is employed, 1st, When that adjective is the only one that precedes the substantive gens : TOUS les gens qui raisonnent ; TOUS les gens pieux. 2dly, When gens is preceded by an adjective which has only one and the same termination for both genders, such as aimable, brave, honnete, etc. TOUS les honnetes gens; TOUS les ha- biles gens. (Acad.} LIVRE, masc. a book ; fern, a pound. MANCHE, masc. the handle of a tool ; fern, a sleeve, the English Channel. MfoioiRE, masc. a memoir, a bill ; fern, the memory. MOUSSE, masc. a young apprentice sailor; fern, moss, froth. PAGE, masc. a page, an attendant ; fern, the page of a book. PKRSONNE (nobody, a person), see No. 116, p. 52. PIQUE, masc. spade at cards; fern, a pike, or long lance. QUELQUE CHOSE is masculine, when it signifies some- thing: Quelque chose m'a e'te DIT ; quelque chose de MKU- VKIIJ.EUX. It is feminine, when it means whatever thing: Quelque chose qu'il ait DITE, etc. (Acad.} tf Observe that when Quelque chose (something) la Immediately followed by an adjective, it takes the preposition de before that adjective; as, (^uelqut cknx,< DE curieujr, something curious. (Acad) 212 EXERCISES ON THE GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. SOURIS, masc. a smile ; fern, a mouse. TOUR, masc. a tour, turn, trick ; fern, a tower. TROMPETTE, masc. a trumpeter ; fern, a trumpet. VOILE, masc. a veil ; fern, a sail. (For the gender of aome particular words, see pp. 22, 23, and 240 EXERCISE CLIII. Several Roman eagles were taken by the Germans, after the ind-3 Germains defeat of Varus, under the reign of Augustus A couple defaitef. regnem. Auguste. of sheep which they roasted themselves, composed the moutonm. qu' faisaient rotir ind-2 feasts of the heroes of Homer We have shot a brace of festin ra. heros d' tue pheasants. Dear child, said a mother to her daughter, without ind-2 thee there is no happiness for me. What wicked people! toi il n' point Quel mechant They are the best people in the world. Young people are Ce de art. often lazy. Military men wear the crape (round their) arm. art. * porter au EXERCISE CLIV. We have eaten excellent pancakes. This book is stereotyped stereotype. At Paris and in the greatest part of France, the pound partie f. art. was sixteen ounces. The Memoirs of Sully are (very much) ind-2 de ' fort esteemed That passage is at the bottom of page 164. bas m. art. ftobody is more unhappy than a miser. Have you seen the qu' avare m. person that I sent to you ? I will give you something que a ai s envoyee * l good. The tower of Cordouan serves ns a lighthouse at de * phare the mouth of the Gironde. embouchure f. f OF NUMBER IX SUBSTANTIVES. 213 III. OF NUMBER IN SUBSTANTIVES. 408. Although there be plurality in the idea, certain French substantives do not take the mark of the plural ; these are : 409. (1.) Proper names ; as, VEspagne s'honore d' avoir vu naitre les deux SENEQUE. Les deux CORNEILLE sont nes ct Rouen. Except when they are used as common nouns, that is to say, to designate individuals similar to those whose name is employed ; as, la France a eu ses CE"SARS et ses POMPE"ES ; that is, generals such as Caesar and Pompey. Les Corneilles et les Miltons sont rares ; that is, poets such as CORNEILLE and MILTON. REMARK. It sometimes happens that poets and orators place the article les before proper names which designate but one individual. This is an irregularity, or at least a license, which can only be tolerated when productive of a fine effect, as in the following phrase of Voltaire : II manque a CAMPISTRON ces expressions heureuses qui font I'dme de la poesic et le merite des HOMERE, des VIR- GILE, des TASSE, des MILTON, des POPE, des CORNEILLE, des RACINE, des BOILEAU. You discover that there is unity in the idea when the sense permits to suppress the article les ; here we might say : le merite d 'Home*re, de Viryile, etc. gsf Although a proper name cannot, in French, take the mark of the plural, with the exception of the case in which it is used as a common noun, yet we write with the sign of the plural les Stuarts, les bourbons, and some others, for the same reason that we say les A llemandt, lea Italiem, because these words are no longer the proper name of an individual, but the proper name of a class of individuals. 214 EXERCISE ON NUMBER IN SUBSTANTIVES. 410. (2.) "Words taken from the Latin, or from any foreign language, and which have not yet been natura- lized by frequent use ; as, des adagio. des alibi. des auto-da-fe.-^ des post-scriptum. des quiproquo. des solo. des Te Deum. des vade-mecum. 3T The French Academy write cleg bravos, des does, des optras, des pensums, because these words are frequently used. 411. (3.) Words naturally invariable, and which are only accidentally employed as substantives ; such as, les' pourquoi, les car, les oui, les won, les on dit, etc. Les f, les car, les pourquoi, sent la porte Par oil la noise entra dans 1'univers (La Fontaine.) EXERCISE CLV. Spain 13 proud of having 1 produced Lucan, Martial, the s'honore inf-1 Lucain, two Senecas, etc. The first of the four Williams came Seneque Guillaume est venu from Normandy Ciceros and Virgils will always be art. art. scarce. The mistakes of apothecaries are very rare quiproquo m. apothicaire sing 1 . tres dangerous. After the victory, they sung Te Deums in all the on ind-3 churches. It was Cardinal Mazarin who introduced in eglisef. C'est art. ind-3 France the taste for operas. That violinist performed gout m. de art. violiniste m. a execute several solos at the last concert He puts postscripts to all m. 32 his letters. Where shall we now find Bonapartes and trouver Wellingtons ? He was the friend of the Bourbons. f Auto-da-fe; three Spanish words which signify Act of Faith. OF COMPOUND SUBSTANTIVES. 215 IV. OF THE FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF COMPOUND SUBSTANTIVES. 412. Compound substantives which have not yet passed to the state of words, that is to say, whose distinct parts are connected by a hyphen, are written in the singular or in the plural, according as the nature and particular sense of the words of which they are composed require the one or the other number.f Such is the general prin- ciple, whose application will be facilitated by the follow- ing rules. 413. RULE I. When a word is composed of a substan- tive and an adjective, both take the mark of the plural ; as, itn petit-maltre, a dandy, pi. des petits-maitres. vne chauve-souris, a bat, des chauves-souris. line basse-cour, a poultry-yard, des basses-cours. To this rule there are a few exceptions; as, UNE grand'mere, plural DES grand 'm&res, 3T GBAJTD, without apostrophe, always agrees In gender and number with Its guti-tnntive, but GKAND' Is always invariable. 414. RULE II. When a compound word is formed of two substantives placed immediately one after the other, both take the mark of the plural ; as, un chef-lieu, a county town, pi. des chefs-lieux. un chou-fleur, a cauliflower, des choux-fleurs. une dame-jeanne, a larrje bottle, des dames-jeauues. The exceptions to this rule are but few, among which is UN Hdtel-Dieu (un hotel de Dieu), a name given to the principal hospital, or infirmary, of several towns in France; plural DES Hdteh-Dieu. 415. RULE III. When a compound word is formed of two substantives joined by a preposition, the first only takes the mark of the plural ; as, un arc-en-ciel, a rainbow, pi. des arcs-en-ciel. un chef-d'oeuvre, a master-piece, des chefs-d'oeuvre. t In compound nouns, the only words susceptible, by their nature, of taking the c-.urk of the plural, are the tubslantire and the objective. 216 OF COMPOUND SUBSTANTIVES. Exceptions. UN tete-&-tete, a conversation or interview between two persons ; plural DES tete-a-tete. UN coq-ct- I'dne, an unconnected, nonsensical speech, passing from one thing to another quite opposite, as from a cock to an ass; plural DES coq-ct-l'dne. EXERCISE CLVI. Those two men are brothers-in-law. I know his two beau-frere grand-fathers. There are in France eighty-six capitals of grand-pere Y avoir chef-lieu m. departments. Rainbows are formed by the reflection of the sing. art. reflexion f. (rays of the sun) in the clouds. In warm countries rayons solaires dans nuage m. Dans art. 2 l pays m. y silk-worms J (are reared) upon (mulberry trees). art. ver-a-soie m. on 6leve sur des murier m. The great nightshade (originally came) from Mexico. belle de nuit pi. sont originaires art. Mexique m. He is always making cock and bull stiries. * fait 32 coq-a-l'dne 416. RULE IV. When a compound word is formed of a substantive joined either to a verb, a preposition, or an adverb, the substantive only takes the sign of the plural, if there be plurality in the idea. So we write with an t in the plural : un avant-coureur, a forerunner, pi. des avant-coureurs. un contre-coup, a counter-blow, des contre-coups. une contre-dansc,t a country-dance, des contre-danses. But we write without an a in the plural, because the expressions are elliptical, and there is unity in the idea : Des reveille-matin (clocks which) 7 ,j n ~i.. awake in the morning), } alarm-clocks. } counter-poisons. t On croit que ce mot eat une alteration de 1'anglals, country-danct 'danie de U contre~e, dc la campagne). OF COMPOUND SUBSTANTIVES. 217 Finally, we write with an s, in the singular as well as in the plural, because there is always plurality in the idea : tin porte-mouchettes (that) A smtffers} des porte-mou- which carries the snuffers) ) stand, j chettes. 417. RULE V. When a compound substantive contains only such parts of speech as the verb, preposition, or adverb, none of its components takes the mark of the plural ; as, impasse-passe, a sleight of hand, pi. des passe-passe. n passe-partout, a master-key, a pass-key, des passe-partout. EXERCISE CLVII. The Cossacks are generally the scouts of the Russian Cosaque ordinairement avant-coureur 3 russe armies Rear-admirals are below vice-admirals. contre-amiral au-dessous de art. vice-amiral Snow-drops bear flowers in the midst of the perce-neige f. porter de art. d, milieu m. rigours of winter. In time of war, the savages of rigueurf. art. En sauvagem. art. America are armed with tomahawks. Gold is the surest of all de casse-tete pass-keys. These (are mere) hearsays. art. Ce ne sont que de art. ou'i-dire V. THE KING'S PALACE; THE QUEEN'S CROWN, ETC. 418. This form of the possessive or genitive case, is ren- dered in French in an inverted manner, the last word com- ing first, as if it were the palace OF THE king, le palais DU rot/ the crown OF THE queen, la couronne DE LA reint EXERCISE CLVIII. (Here are) Josephine's gloves and Alfred's hat. Where is Void John's book ? My uncle's house. The mayor's authority. maison f. maire autarit6 f . 218 OF COMPOUND SUBSTANTIVES. The king 1 of England's palaces. The queen's presence of palais m. mind. Helen's beauty (was the cause of) Troy's esprit Helene h mu. causa Troie destruction. Have you read Milton's Paradise Lost ? Will Paradis ni. Vouloir you lend me La Fontaine's Fables ? Are you going to Mrs prefer - f. Bell's party ? Paul's sister's son entered into the castle. soiree f . dans forteresse f. VI. EAR-RINGS; DINING-ROOM, ETC. 419. These are a kind of compound words, the order of which is likewise inverted in French. Boucles d'oreilles. Salle a manger. Here also, two different prepositions are used, a and de, the choice of which depends upon the nature of the expression. 420. De is used when of, of the, made of, composed of, coming from, can be understood. EXAMPLES. Constructed de bateaux. "tat C oJS l " St Ckinff9 } B- de soie. VindeMadere. EXERCISE CLIX. The golden age is one of the (most agreeable) fictions dgem. 3 les plus agreables 1 - f. of mythology. He has bought a country-house. He is a art. campagne wine-merchant. The garden-seat is broken My uncle has marchand bane m. given me a gold watch, and a silver chain. Do you like chaine f. OF COMPOUND SUBSTANTIVES. 219 Neicfoundland codf I like Burgundy trine. The English Tcrrc-i\euvc tnorucf. Sourgogne import a great quantity of Malta oranges and Turkey figs. importer Malte figue f. 421. A is used in compound words, when for, for the purpose of, by means of, with, may be understood. EXAMPLES. Bateau a vapenr Three thread-stockings. i. e. 1 T> N i & stockings with three threads, f Ba9 k tro13 ^ Note Some compound words take the article besides the preposition a ; (w, wn pot AU lait, a milk-jug. In the following Exercise, when the article is re- quirnl It tins been pointed oat. EXERCISE CLX. The inventor of gunpowder was a German monk, named canon poudref. ind-2 2 l moine Schwartz I have always /ire-arms in my bed-room. Give coucher chambre f. me a wine glass, and a soup spoon. The hay-market verre m. cuiller f. aufoin marche m. is on your left, and the horse-fair is before you There (i gauche aux pi. foire f. devant are (a great many) windmills in France. Have you ever beaucoup de jamais seen a steam-mill f No; but I have seen several water-mills. mais plusieurs eau I lonour to the inventor of the steam-engine ! I like rice-soup. Jfonneur machine f. auriz Take the coffee cups into the dining-room. Where is Porter cafe tasse manger sailed. OH my sister's work-bag f My brother has given me a penknife ouvrage sac m . can?/ m . with an ivory handle __ The waiter has broken the milk-jug * itoire manchem. 20 SYNTAX OF f HE At>JECtiV&. CHAPTER III. OP THE ADJECTIVE. I. CONCORD OF THE ADJECTIVE WITH THE NOUN. 422. GENERAL RULE. The Adjective, in French, must be of the same gender and number as the noun or pro- noun to which it relates, for which purpose it often changes its termination. In English, on the contrary, the adjective is never varied on account of gender or number. EXAMPLES. Le BON pere. La BONNE mere. De BEAUX jardins. De BELLES fleurs. The GOOD father. The GOOD mother. FINE gardens. FINE flowers. Bon is masculine singular, because pere is masculine, and in the singular; bonne is feminine singular, because mere is feminine, and in the singular. Beaux is masculine plural, because jardins is masculine and plural ; belles is feminine plural, because fleurs is feminine and plural. (For the formation of the feminine, and plural of the aijjectives, see p. 2025.) EXERCISE CLXI. The formidable empire which Alexander conquered, 3 1 avait conquis (did not last) longer than his life, which was very short, ne dura pas plus longtemps f. ind-3 court The victory which Csesar obtained on the plains f. remporter ind-3 dans plaine f. of Pharsalia was baneful to his country, pernicious to the Pharsale ind-3 funeste pays m. pernicicux CONCORD OF THE ADJECTIVE. 221 Romans, and disastrous to mankind. (It is believed) Romain desastreux pour art. genre humainm. Oncroit that the first bayonets were made at Bayoune. That baionnettef. ind-3 fabriquer custom is very ancient among us. It is a mere evasion, for coutumeL parmi C' franc defaitef. car the thing 1 is public. Give these fine roses to those good girls. 423. 1st REMARK. When the adjectives demi, half, nu, bare, are placed before a substantive, and when the ad- jective /ew, late, comes before the article or a pronominal adjective, they always remain invariable ; as, une DEMI- licre, half-a-pound ; il va xv-pieds, he goes bare-foot ; FKU la reine, the late queen. But the agreement takes place, if demi and nu be placed after the substantive, and feu after the article or pronominal adjective ; as, une livre et demie, one pound and a half; il a les pieds nus, his feet are bare ; la fcue reine, the late queen ; ma feue niece, my late niece. Observation The adjective demi, placed after the substantive, never takes the mark of the plural ; because it does not agree with the sub- stantive which precedes it, but with a substantive following, which is un- derstood, end which is always of the singular number. This phrase : // a Itudie quatrt ana et demi, he has studied four years and a half, is equivalent to this : II a ftudie quatre ans et un demi an, he has studied four years and one half year. 424. 3d REMARK. Adjectives used adverbially are invariable, that is to say, remain always in the masculine singular ; as, Ces dames parlent HAS, those ladies speak low ; ces fleurs sentent BON, these flowers smell well. EXERCISE CLXII. An Irishman said to a Scotchman: Lend me three guineas. - Irlandais ind-2 Ecossais Preter guinee f. That is impossible, for I (only possess^ half a guinea. Well, Cela car ne possede qu * lend it me, and you will owe me two guineas and a toujours devoir half. They go bare-foot and 6are-headed. I have heard te-te f. out dire 222 CONCORD OF THE ADJECTIVE. your late sister say that her daughter and I were born the a 2 x * moi naquimes same year. The late princess was universally regretted. annee f. ind-3 She sings (out of tune). They spoke loud. Mary, speak low. faux fern, ind-3 haut 425. Besides the general rule upon the agreement of the Adjective with the substantive which it qualifies, there are particular rules which it is indispensable to know, because they serve to explain the general rule. 426. (I.) An adjective referring to two or more sub- stantives singular, of the same gender, must be put in the plural, and agree with them in gender ; as, Le riche et le pauvre sont egaux devant Dieu. La rose et la tulipe sont belles. The rich and the poor are equal before God. The rose and the tulip are beautiful. 427. If the substantives are of different genders, the adjective is to be put in the masculine plural ; as, Ma sosur et mon frere sont at- My sister and brother are at- tentifs. II a montre* une prudence et un courage etonnants. tentive. He has shown astonishing pru- dence and courage. 428. REMARK. When the substantives are of different genders, and the adjective qualifying them has not the same termination for the masculine and feminine, the ear requires that the masculine substantive should be placed last in French, that is to say, immediately before the adjective; so it is better to say: la louche et les yeux OUVERTS, than, les yeux et la louche OUVERTS. EXERCISE CLXIII. Pilpay and Confucius are very celebrated among the nations celebre parmi peuple in. of Asia. Uprightness and piety are (very much) esteemed, art. Ydroiture -\-piete f. tres even by the wicked. Ignorance and self-love are meme de mechant^l. t f. -{amour-propre m. t Sec No. 3n, page 192. CONCORD OF THE ADJECTIVE. 223 equally presumptuous The inhabitants of (Davis' Strait) presomptueux habitant art.detroitdel)avism. eat their flesh and their fish raw. The room and viande f. poisson m. cru chambre f. the closet are open, but the window and the drawer are cabinet m. ouvert f entire f. tiroir m. shut. His sister and brother are very polite. ferme poll 429. (II.) The Adjective placed after two or more sub- stantives which are synonymous or nearly so, agrees with the last substantive only ; as, Toute sa vie n'a 6t6 qu'im tra- vail, qu'une occupation CON- '1INUELLK. Ilia whole, life has been nothing but continual labour and occu- pation. Iii this case, there is really but one word to qualify, because there is only one and the same idea expressed, and it is with the last substantive that the agreement takes place, as striking the mind most. 430. (III.) When substantives are united by the con- junction ou (or), the adjective agrees with the last ; as, Un courage ou une prudence 6 TONNANTE. An astonishing courage or pru- dence. That conjunction ou gives the exclusion to one of the substantives, and it is upon the last, as fixing the atten- tion most, that the qualification falls. 431. REMARK. When an adjective relates to two or more substantives, and is one of those that must absolutely be placed before the substantive, it is repeated, in French, before each substantive, and agrees with it ; as, De ORANDS eVe'uements, et de GKEAT events and revolutions fo/- ORANDES revolutions suivirent lowed the death of Ccesar. la niort de C&sar. EXERCISE CLXIV. Our Queen honours literature with that attachment and les Idtres de m. attachement, * dc 224 PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. patronage capable of Baking- Mt flourish Birds cette protection f. inf-1 -\les fleurir. oiseau m. build their nests with s admirable J art and 2 address. construire nidm.avecun art,* uneadressef. The demi-gods of the ancients were only men who ancien m. ind-2 ne que des (had distinguished themselves) by Extraordinary 'valour 2 or s'etaient distingues une 8 virtue. Louis XIV. had in France an 'absolute une ind-2 un absolu J power and Authority. pouvoir, * une II. PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 432. Some Adjectives are placed before the noun, and some after it ; others are either put before or after, ac- cording as taste or ear may require. However, it may be laid down as a rule that the French more generally place the Adjective after the noun. ADJECTIVES WHICH ARE PLACED BEFORE THE NOUN. 433. (1.) Adjectives of one syllable, as beau, ion, grand, gros, etc., generally precede their substantive. We say, un BEAU jardin, un BON ouvrage, un GRAND chapeau, un SAINT personnage, etc. 434. (2.) Plural Adjectives generally unite harmo- niously with substantives beginning with a vowel ; as, BRILLANTS atours. It is the same with the Adjectives which, although singular, terminate with an x which is pronounced like a z; as, HEUREUX artifice, etc. (See Remark 5th, p. 227.) EXERCISE CLXV. Have you seen the beautiful lake of Geneva ? The Loire lac m. Geneve is a fine river. You arrive at a good moment. The Turks riviere f. le m. Turc make a great use of opium. The big fishes eat the usage m. gros poissonm. f It is only when let is an article, that the contraction of de let into des takes place. The same rule applies to de le, and to a te, d les. PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 225 little ones. What a holy man father Bernard is !_ * saint que art. * He is an old soldier. My dear friend, you are mistaken C' vieux cher se meprendre He is in continual alarms. That child has fine eyes. // dans de alarmef. 132 ADJECTIVES WHICH ARE PLACED AFTER THE NOUX. 435. The Adjectives which are placed after the sub- stantive are : ls, Adjectives which express names of nations ; as, Le gouverneinent ANGLAIS, the English government; Lare'vo- lution FRAN9AISE, the French revolution. REMARK When the name of a nation is an adjective, it does not require a capital letter in French, but it takes one if it be a substantive. So we write: La nation franyaise, amjlaise, espagnole, italienne, al/e- mande. And, with a capital, un Anglais (an Englishman), un Espaynol (a Spaniard), etc (ACAD.) EXERCISE CLXVI. English bravery ; Spanish gravity ; Italian policy ; Roman bravou'ref. f. politiquef. beauty; German music; Dutch manners; Prussian f. hollandais mccurs f. pi. prussien troops ; Swedish soldiers ; Chinese ceremonies. The French troupe f. suedois soldat chinois f. monarchy began under Pharamond, in the year 420. That monarchic?, ind-3 en I' an young German requests you to inscribe your name in 1m pricr d' inscrire sur album. Paul spoke to them in the Hebrew tongue. I have m. 86 en * hebra'ique seen Moscow with its Chinese pagodas, its Italian terraces, and Moscou pagode f. tcrrasse f. its Dutch farms. Nothing stops the Russian coachman, his fermef. n' rnsse cocker driving is a steeple chase; ditch, hillock, overturned tree, course f. course au clocher fosse tertn' "renverse * he leaps over everything. Long live the Irish nation! franchir tout. 335 irlandais f. P 226 PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 436. 2c%, Adjectives denoting colour are placed after the noun; as, un habit NOIK, a black coat; une robe BLANCHE, a white dress ; un ruban BLEU, a blue ribbon. In poetry, and in a figurative sense, Noir may be placed before the substantive ; as, un NOIR atlentat, a black crime. Some compound words, as, rouge-gorge, a Robin-redbreast; du Mane-manger, blancmange, can scarcely be considered as exceptions to this rule. EXERCISE CLXV1I She has blue eyes. The Spanish soldiers wear a red art. porter cockade. (Here is) a beautiful statue of white marble. cocarde f. Void f. Wane marbrc m. The marigold is a yellow flower. Saddle my black horse. I souci m. jaune Seller shall put on my brown coat, and my American boots. mettre * brun americain bottef. Almost all the trees of Florida, particularly the arbre m. art. Floride f. en particulier cedar and the green oak, are covered with a white moss. cedre m. vert chenem. d' mousse f. 437. 3dty, Adjectives formed from the present participle of verbs, are generally placed after the substantive ; as, Un ouvrage divertissant. I An entertaining work. La mode regnante. \ The reigning fashion. 438. But, Adjectives formed from the past participle are always placed after the substantive ; as, Un homme instruit. Une figure arrondie. A well-informed man. A round figure. EXERCISE CLXVIII. (That is) an amusing book. The smiling images of Voila riant f. Theocritus, Virgil, and Gessner, excite in the soul a gentle Tlieocrite t t porter doux feeling. There are striking examples of English sensibilitef. des frappant t Sec Note to liulc VII. p. 200. PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 227 generosity Grateful people are like those 78 f. art. reconnaissaiU personnel. ressembUnt a fruitful lauds which give more than they receive. He has ^fertile l f. rendre ne made astonishing progress. An affected simplicity is a des etonnant progress, pi. affects f. 78 refined imposture. She is a well-informed woman. 'delicat f. C" 439. kthly, Adjectives are placed after the substantive, when expressing some physical or natural quality, such as chaud, hot ; froid, cold ; humide, damp ; and when expressing form, as une table carre'e, a square table. 440. 5thly, Adjectives of several syllables seldom go well before substantives of one syllable ; so, instead of saying les champetres airs, rural airs ; les imaginaires lois, imaginary laws, say les airs champetres, les lois imaginaires. 4-11. Gthly, When two or more adjectives qualify the same noun, they are almost always placed after that noun. So, instead of adopting the English construction, ces deux rirales et guerrieres nations, those two rival and warlike nations, say : ces deux nations guerrieres et rivales. EXERCISE CLXIX. Will you give me some warm water? Bring me some cold chaud milk. Put it on the round table. Never sleep in a damp la it m. rond coucher room. 'Arts '(are divided) into liberal Arts and mechanical art. OH divise en m. mecanique Arts. The king of Spain is styled the Catholic king. She appeler catholique Elle has an harmonious voice. She \sagood and charitable woman. toix f. C" He is an amiable and virtuous man. Do you not know him ? C" vertueux 289 Denmark is, in general, an agreeable and fertile country. 375 pays m 228 PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 442. FINALLY, the placing of a great many Adjectives, before or after the substantive, holds so much to the genius of the French language, that from their being placed before or after, often depends the meaning of the substantive ; and usage dictates so imperiously the law, that by infringing it we would not be understood. LIST OF ADJECTIVES which impart a different meaning to the noun, according as they are placed before, or after it. u Line commune voix, a unani- Une yoix commune, a common mous voice. voice. Une faussc clef, a false key. Une clef fausse, a wrong key. sae portc, a private j. Unc porfe fausse> afahe doo ^ Un furieux menteur, a ter- Tin foil furieux, a furious mad- rible liar. man. Le grand air, noble manners. Une grosse femme, a big stout woman. Le haut ton, an arrogant manner. Un honnete homme, an ho- nest man. Des honnetes gens, respect- able people. Mauvais air, a vulgar appear- ance. Une me"chante (?pigramme, a bad epigram. L'air gTiuul, a noble look. Une femme grosse, same as une femme enceinte. Le ton liaut, a loud tone of voice. Un hommc honnete, a polite man. DCS gens honnetes, polite people. L'air mauvais, an ill-natured look. Une dpigruminc mechante, a wicked epigram. Morte eau, ebb tides. E:\u morte, still water. Le nouveau vin, the wine Lc vin nouveau, the wine newly newly come. made. PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 229 ( Uu habit nouveau, a neic- Un uouvcl nabit, another coat. < fashioned coat. ^Uu habit ncuf, a new coat. Un plaisant homme, a whim- Un liomme plaisant, a pleasant sical ridiculous man. facetious man. Un plaisant persouuage, a Un pcrsonnage plaisant, an contemptible person. am using person. Un plaisant conte, an unlikely Un conte plaisant, an amusing story. story. Un petit homrae, a little man. Un homme petit, a mean man. Lcs propres termes, the exact Les termes propres, correct ex- words. pressions. Un seul homme, a st/igrZe ma?i. Un homme seul, a man alone. homme vilain, EXERCISE CLXX. He opened the presses with false keys. As an actor ind-3 urmoire f. de was walking on tiptoe to represent the great marcher ind-2 le bout des pieds pour Agamemnon, they cried out to him that he was making him a on ind-3 * 86 tall man, and not a great man. Bonaparte had a loud non pas ind-2 tone of voice. He has (got on) a new-fashioned coat. A lady, mis seeing Chapelahi and Patru, said that the first was an author ind-3 ind-2 auteur i'-'lhout genius, and the second a poor author. pauvre 230 GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. Adonne" a, ardent a, bon a, cher a, conforme a, 6ga\a, enclin a, lent a, nuisible a, addicted to. ardent in. good for. dear to. conformable to. equal to. inclined to. slow to, and in. hurtful to. III. GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. One of the difficulties of the French language is to know what preposition must be used after an adjective, as the French prepositions arc not always in this instance correlative to the English prepositions. 443. Adjectives which govern the preposition A. pareil , like. pret ft, ready to. prompt a, prompt in, quick at. propre a, fit for. semblable a, similar to. sensible , sensible of. sourd a, deaf to. sujet &, subject to. utile a, useful to. And in general all adjectives denoting inclination, habit, aptness, fitness. And, when followed by a verb, it is most commonly put in the present of the infinitive. EXERCISE CLXXI. Your intentions are conformable to my wishes He is slow desir m. to punish, and prompt in rewarding 1 . Are you ready to go out ? recompenser. sortir He is fit for anything. He is deaf to remonstrances. tout. art. remontrancef. Sicily is subject to great earthquakes. That man is useful Sidle f. Jm. tremblement de terre. and dear to his family. That is easy to say. It is ridiculous famille f. Cela facile 11 ridicule to put oneself in a passion against objects which are insensible de se t en * colere objet m. of our anger. Your dress is like mine. colere. robe f. t Place of*, Xo. } Kule V. No. 381. GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 231 441. Adjectives which govern the preposition DE. Agreablc de, agreeable to. exempt de, exempt from. aise dr. glad to. fatigue de, fatigued with. avide de, greedy of. heureux de, happy to. capable dc, charge" dr, able to. loaded with. inconsolable j fBCO?woZaWcnt . channu de, charmed with. inquiet de, uneasy about. cheri de, beloved by. libre de, /Vve from. content de, pleased with. mdcontent 'o. 439, p. M7. 236 ADJECTIVES IN THE SUPERLATIVE DEGREE. 459. (2.) When the substantive precedes the superlative, both take the article ; but the substantive takes no article, if the superlative goes first ; as, Les gens les plus habiles. ) ^ , Lea plus habiles gens. j 4GO. (3.) The article placed before plus and mains Is always invariable, when there is no comparison; as, La lime ne nous Main pas autant que le soleil, mme quand elle est LE PLUS brillante. The moon does not light us so much as the sun, oven when It shines brightest. But the article takes gonder and number, when there is a comparison ; as, La lune, est LA PLUS brillante de toutes les planetes, The moon is the most brilliant of all the planets. EXERCISE CLXXVI. She is taller than her sister by the whole head. The more 2 *tout tetef. one reads La Fontaine, the more one admires him. Seneca on Seneque was the richest man in the empire. The highest mountains ind-2 2 x montagnef. are the reservoirs (from which) issue the largest rivers. reservoir m. d'ou sortir grand fleuve m. Those whom 1 have always seen most struck with the writings Cenx que vus frapper de ecrit m. of Homer, Virgil, Horace, and Cicero, are minds of the first t t * t des esprit m. order. Although the Chinese boast of being the most ancient Quoique Chinois se vantcr inf-1 2 nation, they are far from being- the most enlightened. 1 f. loin inf-1 eclair EXERCISE CLXXVII. That man is the best creature in the world. That is the f. Voila cleverest boy in the school. His father is the most learned habile savant man m the kingdom His mother is the most sensible wo- spirituel man in the whole town. Her grandfather is the richest 92 merchant in London. The more you study, the more you negociant learn. Astronomy is one of the sciences which docs moat f. honour to the human mind. 1 See Note to Rule Til., p. JOO. SYNTAX OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. CHAPTER IV. OF PRONOUNS. I. OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. Place of Personal Pronouns. 4.C1. THE Personal Pronouns, whether subjects or objects, are placed before the verb in simple tenses, and before the auxiliary in compound tenses ; except, 1st, When the pronouns take a preposition before them in French ; 2dly, In interrogative sentences ; 3dly, "When the verb is in the imperative affirmative (the third persons exceptecl). Such is the general principle of the position of personal pronouns, which will be fully developed in this chapter. (Sec what has already been stated on tills subject, p. 38.) OP PERSONAL PRONOUNS AS SUBJECTS. 4G2. (1.) The personal pronouns, 7, thou, he or it, she or it, we, you, they, are expressed in French by je, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, Us m., elles f., when they are the subjects or nominatives of the verb ; as, Je parle, I speak ; il chantc, ho sings. Elle danse, she dances; noasjouons, we play. 463. (II.) 7, thou, he, they in. are rendered by moi, toi, lui, eux: 1st, When used in answer to a question ; as, Qui a fait cela? Moi. \ Who has done that fl. 2J, When joined to a noun or pronoun by a con- junction, or when a verb has two or more pronouns as subjects; as, Mon frere ct moi. Lui et moi. Vous, /HI, et moi, nous irons. Afy Irother and 7. He. and 7. Ton, IIP, an'J T irfff go. 238 SYNTAX OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 3d, When they conic after a comparative ; as, II est plus riche que hi, qn'eux et moi. \ He is richer than he, they, and I. 4th, When followed by the relatives gut, que, the adjective seul, or a present participle ; as, Moi QUI suis sou fils. Eux QUE j'aimais tant. Lui SEUL respecte la vertu. Enx, VOYAKT qu'ils avaient I who am his son. They whom / loved so much. lie alone respects virtue. They, seeing that they were in tort. j the wrong. 5th, When they mark opposition or distinction, or point out the part taken in an action by different per- sons ; as, Eux 1'ont releve", et LUI 1'a They raised him up, and he panse. dressed his wounds. ftth, When coming after these expressions, It is, it was, it will be, it would be, or similar ones, whether in the affirmative, negative, or interrogative ; as, It is I, (Test moi. It is he, C'est lui. It is thou, C'est toi. It is they, Ce sont eux, n. elles, f. EXERCISE CLXXVIII. / come from Dover. You like the town, and / the Douvres. country. Who read last ? - He. /am not so tall campagne f. ind-4 le dernier fern. si grand as your sister, but she is older than I. They alone have que Age seul fought the enemy; they alone deserve to be rewarded. combattre meriter d' recompense He, perceiving their intentions, gave up his project. s apercevoir de t abandonner projetm. Your uncles and your brother take charge of the enterprise; se charger they find the money, and he will manage the work. fournir fondspl. conduire ind-7 travail m. Was it he that was singing ? - No, it was /. ind-2 ce qui ind-2 c' ind-2 t Most words ending in ion are alike in both languages. See p. 33. SYNTAX OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 239 464. (III.) Personal pronouns used as subjects, are placed after the verb, although no interrogation is meant: 1st, When the verb is in the present or imperfect of the Subjunctive without any conjunction being expressed. In such a case, the final e of the first person is marked with an acute accent, for the sake of euphony; as, Puiss&je de mes yeux, &c. (CORNEILLE.) May I with my eyes, &c. Dussd-je inourir! (RACIXE.) Were 1 to die! 2d, When the verb is preceded by any of these words, aussi, peut-ttre, encore, en vain, du mains, au mows, dpeine; as, Peut-etre avez-vous raison, En rain prdtendons-nous. Perhaps you are right. It is in vain tiiat we pretend. We might also say : Peut-etre vous avez raison; en vain nous prttendons, but then the expression possesses neither the same grace, nor the same energy. M, In narrations, as in English : Oil allez-vous? lui dis-/e. I Where are you going f said I to him. Je le veux Lien, lui rno>l. rn Grammarians, and finally by the French Academy. 250 SYNTAX OP POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 487. Possessive adjectives are repeated also before the adjectives that do not qualify the same noun; as, MON grand et MON petit appartement, which is equivalent to mon grand APPARTEMENT et mon petit appartement. But I would say : Mox grand et bel appartement, without repeating mon, were I speaking of an apartment both large and beautiful. (Sec what is said upon the repetition of the Article, p. 200 and 201.) EXERCISE CXCI. Cyrus knew all the soldiers of his array, and could ind-2 soldat 93 armee f. pouvoir ind-2 designate them by their names. ! Fotir 'things *(are required) designer nom m. on demande of a woman: that virtue (should dwell) in her heart; that d femme que 371 habite dans modesty (should shine) on her forehead; that gentleness 371 brille front m. 371 douceur f. (should flow) from her lips, and that work (should occupy) decoule levref. 3~ltravailm. occupe her hands. Her father and mother are dead. My uncle and 235 aunt are in Paris. He (showed him) both his fine and ugly tante lui a montre * beau vilain dresses. He showed him his beautiful and rich dresses. habits m. 488. The French make use of the article, and not of the possessive adjective, when the sense clearly points out who is the possessor ; as, .T'ai inal & LA tete. Pierre a rei;u UH coup de feu AU bras droit. / have a pain in MY head. Peter has received a shot in HIS ri'jlt arm. As there can be no doubt as to whose head is aching, and whose arm has received the shot, the French deem the article sufficient. But, to avoid ambiguity, I must say, Je vois que MON bras enfle. / see my arm is swt/linvy '' he who fears the Lord! She who loves vutue if happy- 25G SYNTAX OF RELATIVE PRONOUNS. EXERCISE CXCVII. Happy is he who lives contented with his lot ! He who has vivre content 444 sort m. never been acquainted with adversity, says Seneca, has seen * eprouvi * art. n'a vu, the world but on one side. She who did it was punished. que d' cdte m. ind-4 incl-4 He who thinks (of nobody but himself), excuses others ne qu'd lui-meme dispenser les autres from thinking of him. He who renders a service should inf-1 d rendre doit forget it, he who receives it, remember it. outlier s'en souvenir. 496. In the very familiar style, cela is sometimes con- tracted into qa; as, Donnez-moi qa. (Acad.) IV. OF RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 497. The relative pronouns iuho, which, and that, are expressed by qui, when they are the subject or nomina- tive of a verb ; as, L'homme qui parle. La dame qui chante. La chaise qui vient. The, man who speaks. T/te lady who sings. The chaise which comes. 498. Whom, which, and that, are expressed by que when they are in the accusative, or in other words, the regimen or direct object of a verb ; as, L'homme que je vois. Les chevaux que je vois. La maison que j'ai. The man whom / see. The horses which / see. The house that or which / have. 499. Whom is expressed by qui, when it has no ante- cedent, and means what person; as, Qui appelez-vous ? Whom do you call f Je sais qui vous voulez dire. / knoio whom you mean. to Acar. J'en ai entendu parler. (Acad.) to send. Envoy ez demander. (76.) revivre en sa P^teritd. (Ra- ^ t J to make, to cause. Je le^* npmmer chef. (Le mtme.) to hope. 4 \^ Falloir, to be necessary. II faut voir. (Acad.) s'lma^iner, to fancy. Ils'imagineetre un ^jrand docteur.(76.) Laisser, to leave, to lei. IHome opprimer 1'mnocence. (Rac.) Oser, Paraitre, Pouvoir, Pr^tendre, Savoir, Sembler, fodora. to appear, pour o^ermurmurer? (L. \\parait etre satisfait. (Acad.) to pretend. to Know. seem. II pretend donner la loi. Je sais lire et ecr ire. (Moliere.) ^ &UX humain3 ' ' ' Souhaiter, J Valoir mieui, Venir, Voir, , . i Vouloir, that he is right. II parait I ^ It appears ( 11 est silr / It is certain ) EXERCISE CCXXII. I tremble lest he should come. I wish you may succeed. qu' ne souhaiter I consent that you do it. Do you think it will rain to-day ? croire I do not think it will rain much. Although the wicked sonie- Quoique times prosper, do not think that they are happy.. TIDo you penser believe that the guilty man sleeps tranquilly, and that ho coupable * tranquille OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 287 can stifle the remorse with which he is racked ? It is enough etouffer remordspl. dont dechirer suffire that you order me I think I see him It often commander H me semble happens that we are deceived. arriver on 574. (IV.) The Subjunctive is used after the relative pronouns qui, que, dont, ou, etc., when they are preceded by peu, or by an adjective in the superlative relative degree. Among such adjectives are included le scul, V unique, le premier, le dernier ; as, 11 y a PEU dTiommes qui SACHENT supporter 1'adversit^. Le MEILLEUB cortege qu'un roi PUIS8B avoir, c'est le cceur de ses sujeU. Le chien est LE SEUL animal dont la fidelite" sorr a I'e'preuve. C'est LA SEULE place ou vous FUISSIEZ aspirer. There are few men who can sup- port adversity. The best retinue that a king can have is the love of his subjectt. The dog is the only animal whose fidelity is proof . It is the only place to which you can aspire. 575. (V.) The Subjunctive is used after the relative pronouns qui, que, dont, oil, etc., when we wish to express something doubtful and uncertain ; as, Je cherche quelqu'un qui RENDE ce service. Je sollicite une place que je FOISSE remplir. J'irai dans une retraite ou je sola tranquillo. / seek some one who may render me that service. I solicit a place which I may be able to Jill. I shall retire to a place where 1 may be quiet. It is possible that the person I am seeking may not render me that service ; that I may not be able to fill the place I solicit ; and, that I may not be tranquil in the retreat where I shall go ; it is the subjunctive that expresses this doubt and uncertainty. Observe that we could also say : qui me RENDRA ce service; que je PEUX remplir ; ouje SERAI tranquille ; but the sense would no longer be the same: the action marked by the verbs rendre, pouvoir, and etre, would then be represented as certain and positive. 288 OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 576. (VI.) The Subjunctive is required after quel que, quelque. . ., que, qui, que, quoi, que ; as, Queh que SOIENT vos talents. Quelque riche que vous SOYEZ. Qui que vous SOTEZ, parlez. Whatever your talents may be. However rich you may be. Whoever you be, speak. Quoi qu'on DISE, un anon ne deviendra qu'un ane. (Grozelier.) (See what has already been said on Quelque, p. 57-58.) Finally, The Subjunctive is required after certain con- junctions, see Chapter VIII. EXERCISE CCXXin. He is the only man who lives in that manner. The example (f de la sorte. of a good life is the best lesson that one can give to vie f. on art. mankind. The siege of Azoth lasted 29 years : it is the genre humain m. c' longest siege mentioned in ancient history Show me DONT ttre question a road that will lead to London. However clever chemin m. qui conduire habile '(those two writers) l be, neither the one nor the other will 6crivain f ohtain the vacant seat in the French Academy Whatever place f. a Quoi que you study, you must (apply yourself to it) with ardour. il vous y livrer CONCORD BETWEEN THE TENSES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND THOSE OF THE INDICATIVE AND CONDITIONAL. 577. The Subjunctive mood being always subordinate to a verb that precedes it, its tenses are regulated by this foregoing verb ; as, Je ne CROis pas que vous VENIEZ. / do not think you will come. Je ne CROYAIS pas que vous VINS- / did not think you would come. t See Remarks on Neither, No. 616. CONCORD BETWEEN THE TENSES. 289 578. RULE I. After the present and future of the In- dicative, we use the present of the Subjunctive to express a thing present or future ; but we use the preterite of the Subjunctive to express a thing past : ** e . V que vous etudiiex maintenant. JedSrai } que vous oy ftwftf hier. 579. REMARK. After the present and future of the Indicative, we use the Imperfect of the Subjunctive instead of the present, and the Pluperfect instead of the preterite, when some conditional expression is introduced in the sentence : Je doute ) que vous etudiastiez maintenant, demain, si Je douterai \ Ton ne vous y contraignait. Je doute ) que vous emsiez etudie bier, si 1'on ne vous Je douterai \ y cut contraint. EXERCISE CCXXIV. Do you doubt that I am your friend? Does he think 1 douter shall have time ? I don't think you have learned mathe- art. art. matica. He will wait till you are ready. She will wish que vouloir que your sister to be one of the party. I shall always doubt that * partie f. you have used all your endeavours. Do you think I might faire effort m. pouvoir speak to him, were I to go now? / doubt whether my si y ind-2 que brother would have succeeded, (had it not been for) your reussir sans assistance. 580. RULE II. After the Imperfect, the Pluperfect, any of the Preterites or Conditionals, we use the Imper- fect of the Subjunctive, if we mean to sxprcss a thing T 290 CONCORD BETWEEN THE TENSES. present or future ; but to express a thing that is past, we use the Pluperfect : Je doutais Je doutai E1 U d t<$ " , demain. Je douterais J'anrais doute" Je doutais Je doutai j, al . ou , .. \ que vous eustiez etudie la semaine passe*e. Je douterais J'auraia doute" 581. REMARK. With a Preterite indefinite the follow- ing verb is put in the Present of the Subjunctive, if we intend to express a thing which is, or may be done at all times ; as, Dieu A ENTOUR^ les yeux de tuniques fort minces, transpa- rentes au dehors, afin que Ton PUISSE voir a travers. God has surrounded the eyes -with very thin tunics, transparent on the outside, that we may set through them. And in the Preterite of the Subjunctive, if we intend to express something past ; as, II A FALLU qu'il se soil bien de la peine. He must have given himself a great deal of trouble. EXERCISE CCXXV. He was waiting till I should be ready. Would you wait till attendre que que we should be ready? Sparta was sober before Socrates had Sparte avant que praised sobriety; before he had praised virtue, Greece abounded avant qu' abonder in virtuous men. William in. left, at his death, the reputa- laisser tion of a great politician, although he had not been popular, politique populaire and of a general (to be feared), although he had lost many d craindre, battles. You must have had (a great deal) of patience II afallu beaucoup OF TUB PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 291 OF THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 582. The Present Participle always terminates in ant, and is invariable : A man reading ; men reading. A woman reading; women read- ing. Un homme lisant; des homines lisant. Une femme lisant ; des femmes lisant. We say, however : Des homines obligeants; une I Obliging men; a charming wo- femme charmante. man. But the words obligeants, charmante, are not here pre- sent participles ; they are verbal adjectives. 583. We call verbal adjectives, those adjectives which are derived from verbs ; as, charmant, menagant, &c. These adjectives always agree in gender and number with the nouns which they qualify. The verbal adjective simply expresses a quality ; the present participle expresses an action. N.B. In English, the verbal adjective is placed before the noun, and the present participle after it. In French, both are generally placed after. See No. 437. 584. REMARK. The present participle is often used in English as a noun, which is never the case in French : Le jeu et la chasse sont la mine GAMING ane?HDNTiNO are the ruin de bien des gens. of many people. EXERCISE CCXXVI. 4 David Ms 'often 'represented playing on the harp. She on iud-1 de is a woman of a good disposition, obliging her friends, whenever caractere m. guand an occasion (presents itself). Those men foreseeing the danger, I' s'en presente. privoir put themselves on their guard. Those foreseeing men have Pi- perceived the danger. The ruling passion of Caesar was apercevoir dominant 292 OF THE PAST PARTICIPLE. ambition. Your sister is charming; how obliging she is! que Her singing was much admired. chant m. ind-3 fort OF THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 585. (I.) The Past Participle employed without an auxiliary, agrees, like an adjective, in gender and number, with the noun or pronoun to which it relates ; as, Les me'chants ont bien de la peine The wicked have much difficulty in a demeurer UNIS (Fe'nelon.') remaining united. Que de ramparts detruits ! que de villes forcees I (Boileau.") 586. (II.) The Past Participle, accompanied by the auxiliary verb etre, agrees with its subject or nominative in gender and number ; as, Mon frere est venu. Ma sceur est venue. Mes freres sont venus. Mes soeurs sont venues. L'arme'e a e'te't vaincue. Les ennemis ont e"te" vaincus. My brother is come. My sister is come. My brothers are come. My sisters are come. The army has been conquered. The enemies have been conquered. Sometimes the subject is placed after the participle, but this construction does not alter the agreement of the participle : Quand il vit Vurne oil etaient RENFERM^ES les CENDRES d'Hippias, il versa tin torrent de larmes. (Ft- nelon.J 587. (III.) When the Past Participle follows the verb avoir, it never agrees with its subject ; as, Mon pere a ecrit. Ma mere a ecrit. Mes freres ont ecrit. Mes soeurs ont ecrit. My father has written. My mother has written. My brothers have written. My sisters have written. EXERCISE CCXXVH. A quarrelsome dog has always a torn ear The ceiling 1 * hargneux I' dechirer plafond m. of the Egyptian temples was painted blue. That letter is en t The participle iU never varies. We say or elle a iU, he or she ha been ; ilt or tilts ont itt, they have been. OF TIIE PAST PARTICIPLE. 293 well written. The city of London, having been burnt in ville f. 1GOG, was rebuilt in three years, more beautiful and more rebdtir annee f. reg-ular than before. The ancient Greeks were persuaded that auparavant. persuader the soul is immortal. It is to Jeuner that 2 (the discovery of decouverte f. vaccination) J (is due). Artemisia survived 2 (Mausolus, her vaccine f. Artemise n' ind-4 a Mausole husband), J (only two years). The Amazons have acquired que an m. Amazone celebrity. They have executed the orders of Your Excellency. 32 3* To make a right application of the following rules, the student must distinguish well a direct regimen from an indirect regimen, for this is the pivot on which turn the principal difficulties of the past participle. For the meaning of regimen, see Nos. 405, 466, 500. 588. (IV.) The Past Participle accompanied by the auxiliary avoir, always agrees with its direct regimen, when that regimen is placed before the participle ; as, La lettre que vous avez ecrite. Voici les lettres que j'ai reeves. Oil est votre livre ?~je Tai perdu. Ou est votre plume ?-je /'ai perdue. Oil sont vos livres?-je les ai perdus. Us r/i'ont felicite. II nous &felicites. Ouelle affaire avez- vous entreprise f Que de desagrementa ils m'ont causes ! Comlien de livres avez-voua lus ? The letter which you have written. Here are the letters which / have received. Where is your book ?-Ihave lost it. Where is your pen f-I have lost it. Where are your books f-I have lost They ha ve congratulated me. [them. He has congratulated us. [taken ? What business have you under- What vexations they have caused me! How many books have you read ? These Examples show that the direct regimen which precedes the participle is expressed either by one of these pronouns que, le, la, les, me, nous, te, vous, se, or by a noun preceded by quel, que de, or combien de. In the first example ecrite agrees with que, of which the antecedent is lettre, feminine and singular. In the fifth example, perdus agrees with les, which stands for its antecedent livres, masculine and plural. 2U 1 OF THE PAST PARTICIPLE. A lady would say, Us m'ontfelicitee. [ They have congratulated me. Fc'lidtee agrees with me, of which the antecedent dame is understood. The same analysis applies to the other and similar cases. gS Observe that the rule says direct regimen, for although we say, TL nous a vus, he has seen us ; we could not say, // nous a DITS cela, he has told us that : we must say, II nous a DIT cela ; because nous is here used for a nous, and is an indirect regimen. EXERCISE CCXXVIII. Here is the answer which I have received The sciences reponse f. f. which you have studied, will prove infinitely useful to you etre General Villars often said, that the two 2 (most lively) art. vif pleasures he had felt in his life, had been the first subj-2 ressentir ind-2 prize which he had obtained at college, and the first victory prix m. ind-2 which he had gained over the enemy. Where is my ind-2 remporter watch ?- 1 have not seen it They have deceived us. What montre f. tromper answer have they given you? How many enemies has he not on jaire conquered! The house which her father has bought, vaincre que 589. (V.) After the auxiliary avoir, the Past Participle remains invariable when the direct regimen is placed AFTER the participle, or when there is no direct regimen ; as, Nous avons reyu votre lettre. Us ont perdu leurs livres. J'ai recompense mesjils, We have received your letter. They have lost their books. / have rewarded my sons. No agreement here takes place, because the direct regimens votre lettre, leurs livres, mes fils, are placed after the participles re$u, perdu, recompense'. OF THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 295 Iii the same manner, we write without varying the participle : Elle a cianse. Nous avons chanti. Ils ont repondu a notre attente. She has danced. We have sung. They have answered our expecta- tion. Because the verbs danser, chanter, repondre, have not here any direct regimen. 590. REMARK. It follows from the preceding rule, that the participle of neuter verbs, which are conjugated with avoir, never varies, since that class of verbs has no direct regimen. Thus, in Les cinq heures quej'ai DORMI (the five hours that I have slept), les dix ans qu'il a \tcv (the ten years that he has lived), the participle of the neuter verbs dormir and vivre does not vary, and the relative que which precedes, although presenting itself under the form of a direct regimen, is in reality but an indirect regimen, equivalent to pendant lequel: les cinq heures PENDANT LESQUELLES j'ai dormi, les dix ans PENDANT LESQUELS ll a Ve'cU. Note Sometimes neuter verbs are employed actively, then their participles agree, if preceded by a direct regimen ; as, La langue que Ciceron a PARLE, the language which Cicero has spoken. EXERCISE CCXXIX. I hare received no answer. He has named several persons. plusieurs Cromwell governed England under the title of Protector. ind-4 Men have never reaped the fruit of happiness from the tree of cuellir sur injustice The Romans triumphed successively over the iud-4 successivement de '(most warlike) Nations. They danced a great deal at the bclliqueux f. ind-4 last ball. We have laughed heartily. We must deduct balm. deboncoeur. H retranckcr from life the hours we have slept, on 296 OF THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 591. (VI.) The verb etre being used instead of avoir in pronominal or reflected verbs, the participle of these verbs follows exactly the same rules as the participle con- jugated with avoir ; that is, the participle of a reflected verb agrees with the direct regimen when preceded by it, but remains invariable, when the direct regimen is placed after it, or when there is none. So we write with agreement : Nous nous sommes blesses. Lucrece s'est tuee. We have hurt ourselves. Lucretia killed herselt Because the participles blesses, tuee, are preceded by their direct regimens nous, se. But we write without agreement : Lucrece s'est donne la mort. | Lucretia destroyed herself. Because the participle donne is followed by its direct regimen la mort. In this example, se is an indirect regimen or dative. We write also without varying the participle : They have written to each other. II se sont ecrit. Nous nous sommes succede. We have succeeded one another. Here, the participles ecrit and succede have no direct regimen. It is as if it were : Us out ecrit a EUX : Nous avons succe'de a NOUS. 592. REMARK. It follows from the foregoing rule, that verbs essentially pronominal, that is, verbs which cannot be conjugated without two pronouns of the same person, as je me repens, je m'abstiens, require their participles always to agree, because these verbs have for direct regimen their second pronoun ; as, We have abstained from all rs- Nous nous sommes abstenus de toute reflexion. Mes amis, vous vous tes repentis. flections. A/y friends, you have repented. EXERCISE CCXXX. Madame de S^rign^ has rendered herself celebrated by the se rendre graces of her style. She perceived herself in that glass. m. s'apercevoir ind-4 glace f. OF THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 297 That lady has given herself fine dresses. Some robe f. Quclques-una of our modern authors have imagined that they surpassed the s'imaginer iud-2 ancients They have spoken to one another They have se parlor succeeded one another. Those boys have repented. The se repentir troops have seized the town. s'ciiiparer de 593. (VII.) The participle of a unipersonal (or imper- sonal) verb is always invariable : Les chaleura qu'il a JAIT cet ft& La disette qu'il y a EU 1'hiver dernier. 27- near. proche, ) au-dessus, above. Pres DE la poste. Autour DU bras. au-dessous, under, below. autour, around. le long, along. vis-a-vis, opposite. EXAMPLES. Near the post-office. Round the arm. Note. In the familiar style, and in conversation, the preposition DE is sometimes omitted after pres, proche, and vis-a-vis / as, Je loye Varsenal, vis-a-vis la nouvelle rue. EXERCISES ON PREPOSITIONS. 307 820. (7.) The prepositions JUSQUE, till, until, even, as far as, and QUANT, as to, as for, require the preposition 4 after them; as, Depuis Piques jusqu' A la Pentecote. Quant A moi. Quant A elle. From Easter till Whitsun- day. As for me. As for her. EXERCISE CCXXXIX. I live near the gate Saint-Martin. Above the door were demeurer porte f. ind-2 written these words In the 'ecclesiastical Jhierarchy, 586 mot m. ecclesiastique hierarchie f. h asp. the bishop is below the archbishop. The queen had her archeveque. daughters around her. We came along the river side. ind-4 riviere f. * He lodges opposite my windows All fathers, even the most art. grave, play with their children. Let us go together as far jouer as Oxford. As for him, he (shall act) as he pleases. en usera lui iud-7 EXERCISE CCXL. 'JSsculapius J (is represented) with a snake in his hand Esculape on represente couleuvre f. a or around his arm, and a cock near him. The Falls of coq cataracte f. s. Niagara are near the boundaries of the United States se trouve lintitef. Etats-Unis and Canada. The Americans place Washington ami 31 m. Bolivar above Alexander and Caesar. The planets are de planete f. opaque bodies which turn around the sun, from which they tourner oii derive light and heat. There are forests of canes tirer lumieref. chaleurf foretf. cannef. along the Ganges. I will wait for you till two o'clock. Gangem. 151 308 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. CHAPTER VIII. OP THE CONJUNCTION. 621. IN French, some conjunctions require the verb which follows them to be in the indicative, some in the sub- junctive, and others in the infinitive mood. 622. The following Conjunctions, and Conjunctive Locutions, require the indicative mood: Ainsi que, apres que as, as well as. after. [as. >as soon as. attendu que, considering that, ausaitot que, d&s que, autant que, as much as [what. a ce que, as, as far as, from a mesure que, as, in proportion au lieu que, whereas. [as. depuis que, lorsque, parce que,t since. when. because. peut-etre que, puisque, vu que, perhaps. since. as long as. seeing that. They require the indicative, because the principal sen- tence, which they unite with that which is incidental, expresses affirmation in a direct and positive manner. ) Observation. Par ce que (in three words) is not a conjunction, though sometimes mistaken for one. It signifies, by that which, by what. EXERCISE CCXLL As soon as the Khan of Tartary has dined, a herald cries kanm. heraut that all the other princes of the earth may go and dine, terref. ind-1 * if (they please). A child ought not to 2 obtain 1 anythiug, bon leur scmble. ne doit * rien because he asks for it, but because he has need (of it). * besoin en We must not judge of a man by what he (is ignorant of), II falloir ignore SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. 309 but by what he knows. Whilst we are in prosperity, savoir on art. we must prepare for adversity. As long as I have il se d art. ind-7 money, you shall not want any. manquer en 623. The following Conjunctions, and Conjunctive Locutions, require the subjunctive mood. ^inorderthat. before. unless. in case that. avant que, a moins que,t au cas que, ile crainte que,f | f orfear J est de peur que,t i J or J ear > ie - jusqu'a ce que, till, until. pour peu que, 1 however si peu que, ) little. pourvu que, provided that. quoique, ~| bien que, >though,althoufjh. encore que, ) sans que, without. soit que, whether. suppose" que, supposing that. They require the subjunctive, as they always imply doubt, desire, uncertainty. 624. Remark on the, conjunction QUE. Learners are often mistaken, by supposing that QUE always requires the verb which follows it to be in the subjunctive mood ; but QUE does not govern any particular mood. It is the positive or doubtful sense of the first verb that requires the second to be in the indicative or subjunctive.^ There are, however, several cases in which QUE requires the subjunctive after it. These are when QUE is used instead, or in the sense of some conjunctions which themselves always govern the subjunctive, such as a/in que, avant que, a moins que, jusqu'a ce que, quoique, sans que, soit que, suppose' que ; as, Approchez, QUE je vous voie (a/in que.) Attendez QUE la pluie soit passde (jusqu'St ce que.) Come near, thai I may see you. Wait until tie rain be over. t A moiru que, de crainte que, de peur que, require nt before the verb whlcb follows them, although not having a negative tcnfe. I See the yntax of this mood, p. 310 EXERCISES ON THE CONJUNCTION. EXERCISE CCXLII. The Apostles received the gift of tongues, that they might iud-3 donm. pouvoir preach the Gospel to all the nations of the earth. If my Evangile m. brother come before I am up, show him into the dining- ind-1 leve faire entrer room, and give him a newspaper to amuse himself with till * I come down. Unless you be useful, you will not be sought after. descendre recherche Speak low, for fear anybody should hear you. Though on entendre you are learned, be modest. Get in without his seeing you. instruit Entrer 625. The following Conjunctions govern the infinitive : au lieu de, instead of. loin de, far from. de crainte de, \for, or from de peur de, j fear of. plutot que de, rather than. \- Avant de, and avant que de, are both correct expressions ; but present usage is decidedly in favour of avant de. Note. A cause que, devant que, durant que, malgri que, are found among the Tables of Conjunctions, and in the Exercises of many Grammars ; but these are antiquated expressions. A cause que is replaced by parce que ; devant que, by avant que ; durant que, by pendant que ; and malgri que, by quoique. EXERCISE CCXLIH. He works in order to acquire riches and consideration Before acquerir f. granting him my confidence, I shall examine if he is worthy of confiance f. it. Instead of studying, he does nothing but amuse himself. ne * que se divertir. Far from thanking me, he has scolded me. Charles VII., grander king of France, abstained from eating, in fear of ind-3 par art. crainte f. being poisoned, and allowed himself to die, from fear of se laisser ind-3 peur dying. Rather die than do a dishonourable action. inf-1 Idchete f. Aim de, to, in order to. avant de,t l be f ore . avant que de, j J a moius de, a moins que de, OF ABBREVIATIONS. 311 626. The INTERJECTIONS have been treated of in page 190: their construction is the same in French as in Eng- lish ; they require, therefore, no further explanation. The soul is the only syntax for interjections, and they can never embarrass the student, since they do not require any rules. 627. OF ABBREVIATIONS. There are certain French words which it is customary to abridge and represent by capital letters, as follows : J.C. for Jesus-Christ. N.S. ... Notre- Seigneur. N.S. J.C. ... Notre- Seigneur Jesus-Christ. S.S. ... Sa Saintete. S.M. ... Sa Majeste. LL. MM. ... Leurs Majestes. S.M.I. ... Sa Majeste Imperiale. S.M. T.C. ... Sa Majeste Tres-Chretienne. S.M.C. ... Sa Majeste Catholique. S.M.T.I'. ... Sa Majeste Trfcs-Fidele. S.M.B. ... Sa Majeste Britannique. S.M.S. ... Sa Majeste Suedoise. S.A. ... Son Altesse. S.A.R. ... Son Altesse Royale. S.A.I. ... Son Altesse Imperiale. S.Ex. ... Son Excellence. S.Em. ... Son Eminence. Me 1 " ... Monseigneur. M. or M r * ... Monsieur. MM. or M ra * ... Messieurs. M me . . . Madame. M lle ... Mademoiselle. M d ... Marchand. M de . . . Marchande. Neg 1 ... Negociant. C te ... Compagnie. (Encycl. method. Gram, des Gram. Acad.) * The first is more used in print, and the latter in writing. J/tW is tlso a good abbreviation of Messieurs. [ 312 ] PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES ON THE NINE PARTS OF SPEECH, AND ON THE PRINCIPAL NICETIES, DIFFICULTIES, AND IDIOMS OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. CCXLIV I look upon the silence of the abb6 Sieyes, said regarder Mirabeau, as a public calamity. Saying of Peter the Great : Mot It requires three Jews to deceive a Russian. A Swiss proverb: 187 644 Keep at least three paces from him who hates bread, and the 247 toi d voice of a child. Every Roman knight had a horse maintained 120 entretenir at the expense of the republic, and wore a gold ring as a mark pi. 419 of his dignity. I bequeath to surgeon Larrey, 100,000 fr. ; Je legue he is the most virtuous man I have known. (Napoleon's Will.) 493 * subj-1 CCXLV. It is related of Alexander that he said of 111 ind-2 Diogenes, that if he had not been Alexander, he (would have) etit edt wished to be Diogenes. It was at the battle of Cressy (1346) 98 that for the first time the English made use of artillery. Go, fois f. my friends, said Napoleon to his grenadiers, fear nothing, the ind-2 293 ball which will kill me is not yet cast. The Spaniards ind-7 fondre compare Charles V. to Solomon for wisdom, to Csesar for 76 courage, to Augustus for good fortune Such was Sheridan ! bonheur m. he could soften an attorney 1 There has been nothing like it since the days of Orpheus. (Byron.) EXERCISES ON IDIOMS. 313 CCXLVL " Soldiers," said Bonaparte, in one of Lis pro- ind-2 clamations, " you have, in a fortnight, gained six victories, remporter taken twenty-one standards, fifty pieces of cannon, several drapeau m. strong places, made fifteen thousand prisoners, killed or 76 wounded more than ten thousand men. You have won battles de without artillery, crossed rivers without bridges, performed passer faire forced marches without shoes, bivouacked without brandy and bivaquer often without bread. Thanks be rendered to you, soldiers ! Ordcei. The country has a right to expect great things from you. Patrie f. You have yet combats to wage, towns to take, rivers to cross. livrer Friends, be the liberators of the people, do not be pevple pi. their oppressors." en jieau in. CCXLVH. The castle clock struck twelve. At that mo- sonner En ment the buzzings of the crowd ceased, and a little man, bourdonnement m. dressed in a green uniform, white trousers, and wearing 253 d' tf chaussi de riding-boots, appeared all on a sudden, keeping on his head 4, I'ecuyere en 146 A three-cornered hat as fascinating as he was himself. The d trois comes prestigious I' broad red riband of the Legion of Honour floated on his ind-2 breast. A small sword was at his side. He was perceived poitrine f. apercevoir by all eyes, and at once. Immediately, cries of: Long live 335 the Emperor ! were uttered by the enraptured multitude. pousser enthousiasmer f. 314 EXERCISES ON IDIOMS. CCXLVIIL Botanists assure us that corn is nowhere to * ble m. be found in its primitive state. This plant seems to have 643 been confided, by Providence, to the care of man, with the pi. use of fire, to insure him the sceptre of the earth. With corn 541 and fire, we can acquire all the other goods. Man, with corn on bien m. alone, can feed all the domestic animals that sustain his life, nourrir 248 and share his labours ; the pig 1 , the hen, the duck, the pigeon, partager the ass, the sheep, the goat, the horse, the cow, the cat, and brebis f. chevre f. the dog, which give him, in return, eggs, milk, bacon, wool, rendre services, and gratitude. CCXLIX. My dear Friend, Pray, apply yourself diligently to your exercises ; for though 5 appliquer the doing them well is not supremely meritorious, the doing meritoire them ill is illiberal, vulgar, and ridiculous. ignoble I send you enclosed a letter of recommendation for Marquis ci-inclus Matignon, which will at once thoroughly introduce you tout d'un coup into the best French company. Your character, and conse- reputation quently your fortune, absolutely depends upon the company ae you keep, and the turn you take at Paris. I do not, tournure f. in the least, mean a grave turn; on the contrary, a gay, a nullement sprightly, but at the same time an elegant and liberal one. EXERCISES ON IDIOMS. 3l5 Keep carefully out of all quarrels. Many young 1 Frenchmen are hasty and giddy. But these young men, when mellowed by age and experience, very often turn out able men. The number of great generals and statesmen, as well as authors, that France has produced, is an undeniable proof of it. (Lord Chesterfield, to his Son.) CCL. Scotland is a picturesque country. The country has its amusements and beauties, but I prefer town It is very fine weather That requires much time I saw him to-day for the first time I know him, but I do not know where he lives. If your sisters are at home, bring them with you; we shall be delighted to see them. Bring me a few French books well bound in calf. There is some cold veal. Here is a calfs head. Cut some bread. Give me the loaf. The poorest of the Russians have a tea-pot, a copper tea-kettle, and take tea, morning and evening. It requires an iron hand in a silk glove. Andrew was Simon Peter's brother. CCLI. Knock at the door. There is no knocker. She is always cross. What a pretty gold cross she wears ! She reads better now, and better books. If I had better paper and a better pen, I would write better. She has married my brother. It was our bishop that married them. Look at tliis boy. He looks well to-day. I have called at your house Tell nim to call again. Call the waiter I am a bachelor They say the plague is at Smyrna. Don't plague me. When Cromwell gave half-a-crown a-aay to every dragoon, he readily got recruits for the Parliamentarian armies- CCLII. The sons of the emperors of Russia take the title of Grand-duke. Take my horse to the stable. Take the saddle to the saddler. If you are going to Canterbury, take me with you. Take this bonnet to your sister. I take a cun of coffee every morning. It has rained all the morning. I will go and see you on Friday evening I shall spend the evening with you He has spent all his money. I come from Paris, and 1 will return to- morrow. I am going to Paris, and I will return next week. Return me my money. Have I not returned it to >ou? Gar- dener, have you swept all the walks ? Good bye, ladies ; I wish you a pleasant walk. INDEX. A Page A ; with and without accent, 8 Proper names ending in a, 37 English indef. art. 14, 199, 206 T, ... ( 8, 14. 15, 185, Preposition, | ^ ^ ' Verbs which require d, . . 273 Abbreviations in the Exercises, 6 of Titles, . .311 Abstain (to), s'abstenir, . .133 Accents ; number and use, . 8 A djective ; Feminine of, 20 to 25 Plural of, 25, 26 Possessive, 42 Demonstrative, .... 44 Numeral, .... 31, 233 Cardinal, .... 31, 233 Ordinal, .... 31, 34, 233 General Rule on, .... 66 Concord of the, . '220 to 224 Used adverbially, . . . 221 Place of the, . . 224 to 230 Government of the, 230 to 233 Of Number, its synt, . . 233 Of Dimension, .... 234 In the Comparative Degree, '235 In the Superlative Degree, 235 A dverb ; its place, . . 1 75, 299 How formed from an adj. . 179 Of Quantity, . . . 176,266 A leul ; its plural, .... J 9 All, 17,26,56 A Her; s' en oiler, . . 117,118 A Iphalet (French), .... 7 A Itkough, quoique 309 Always, toujours, . . . .178 Antecedent; its meaning, . . 47 Any; how expressed in French, 16 Apostrophe, 9 Appartenir, see Tenir, . .133 Around, 305 Article, ... 13, 14, 15, 16 Contraction of, .... 14 Partitive, . . . 16, 62, 198 When used, . . 192 to 202 When not used, 197, 202 to 210 When invariable 236 Aucun, aucu ne, none, ... 55 A utrui, others 52 A vant, devant, 305 Avant de, avant que de, . . 310 ^lm>,tohave; its conjugation, 60 Barefoot, 221 Beaucoup ; Remark on, . . 300 Before ; how expressed, 305, 310 Benir, to bless, Remark on, 122 Best 30 Setter 30 and be tier, . . . .177 Bien, Remarks on, . 207, 300 Born (to be), naltre, . . .163 Both, 53,264 Ga, for cela, 256 Can (to be able to), pouvoir, 139 Cases; if any in French, . . 11 Ce, demonst. pron., 45, 254, 255 Cedilla, 10 Cent ; when it takes an s, . . 34 Chacun, every one, . . 52, 262 Chaque, every, each, ... 55 del; its plural, 19 Collective nouns, . 17, 33, 34, 265 Comparative degree, . 27, 28, 235 Comparison, degrees of, . . 26 Compound nouns, . 215 to 220 Compound tenses ; how formed, 59 Concord between the tenses, 288 Conditional mood, .... 284 Conjugations; how distinguish- ed, 59 First in er, 69 Second in ir, 73 Third in oir, 77 Fourth in re, 80 Negatively, 83,84 Interrogatively, . . . 87, 88 Interrogatively & negatively, 90 Conjugation Of Passive verbs, .... 92 Of Pronom. or Reflect, verbs, 96 Of the same, negatively, 99 ; interrogatively, 101 ; in- terrogatively and nega- tively, 102 Of Impersonal or Uniperi. 103 INDEX. 317 Pace Conjuga tion Of verbs in ger, eer, cer, uer, tier, eter, yer, ier, 108 to 117 Conjunction*; the principal, 188 Some gx>vern the indie. . . 308 Some the subj. or inf. 309, 310 Connaitre, to know, . . .151 Its difference from tavoir, 141 Craindre, and verbs in aindre and oindre, ...... 153 Cm; with and without accent, 9 JD ; takes the sound of t, . 90 Dans, en ; how used, . . . 304 Dale, how to, ..... 34 De, . 14, 15, 182, 186, 218, 303 Verbs which require de, . 274 Deceive (to), tromper, like purler, 69 Degrees of comparison, ... 26 Demi ; Remark on, ... 221 Demonttrath-e adjectives, . . 44 -- pronount, 45, 46, 254, Dii ; with and without accent, 8 Derant, avant, ..... 305 Diceretis, ....... 10 Die (to), ..... 128,173 Distributive nouns, . . . 33, 34 Do, did, ...... 69, 83 - (to), faire, ..... 159 Du ; with and without accent, 9 J^J ; gender of noung ending in, 12 Each, ..... 52, 55, 262 Eat (to), manger, . . . .108 Either, ........ 264 Elision of vowels, .... 9 Elle ; its derivation, ... 13 Ellipsis ; Note on, . . . 258 En ; pronoun, .... 49, 50 Preposition, 187, 273, 303, 304 Governs the Particip. pros. 273 En, dant, ....... 304 Entre; when written entr", . 10 Eire, to be ; its conjugation, 64 Eye, eyu, ....... 19 u , adv 178 Lose (to), perdre, .... 81 L'un i'autre, fun 6 Repentir (se), see Sentir, . . 180 IXDEX. 319 Page Resolv, ; Rttout, 168 Request (to), prior, .... 116 O avoir, to know, .... 141 Without pat and point, . 301 Say (to), dire, 156 Se, . . ..... 41,248 See (to), voir, 143 Sell (to), vondre, 80 Send (to), envoyer, . . . .115 back, renvoyer, . . . 115 Serve (to), to help to, servir, . 131 Set out, (to), partir, .... 129 Several, plusieura, .... 56 She who, he who, 255 Si, if, 9, 284 Sing (to), chanter, .... 71 Soi, 41,248 Some; how expressed, . . 16,198 Something, 211 Sometimes, 178 Sovereigns, 35, 204 Speak (to), parler, .... 69 Steam-engine ; how translated, 186 Subjunctive mood; when used, 285 Substantive; plural of, . 17 to 20 Gender of, 11,210 Number in, . . . 213,214 Plural of compound, . . 215 Superlative degree, .... 28 Sur ; with and without accent, 8 Syntax, 192 J. ake (to), prendre, . . .167 Tel, idle, such, 54 Tell (to), dire, 156 Tense* ; formation of, 59, 67, 68 Syntax of, ... 279 to 291 Their, its, 42, 252 Thousand, mille, 34 To ; how translated, . 14,272 When expressed by pour, 278 Tout 17, 26, 56 Trema, or dierise 10 Trii; its derivation, ... 29 TV, ; with and without accent, 9 Uniperional verb*, .... 103 V enir, to come, . . . . ] 34 Verb; how many kinds of verbs, 59 Conjugated negatively, . 83, 84 Interrogatively, . . . 87, 88 Interrogatively and nogativ. 90 Active verbs, ..... 69 Passive, ..... 92,271 Neuter, ....... 94 Pronominal, reflective, re- ciprocal, ...... 95 Impersonal or Uniporsonal, 103 Verbs ending In ger, eer,cer, uer, eler, eter,yer, ier, 108 to 117 Observations on ..... 67 Agreement of the, . . . 263 Place of the subject of the, 208 Government of tho, . . . 270 Verbs which require d, . : 273 Verbs which require de, . 274 Verbs which require no pre- position, ...... 277 Very, ........ 29, 300 Vingt ; when it takes an *, . 34 Vivre ; remarks on, . . . . 1 73 Vowels, ........ 7, 9 W ; when used, .... 7 Wait, wait for, attendro, . . 81 Who, which, ...... LV.i! Whom, which, . . . 256, 260 (of) Whose, of whom, of which, . 259 Words alike in French and English, 36 Worse, 30 Worst, W Write (to), ecriro, . . . . 157 Y, 7, 50, 178 FINIS, PRINTED BY WILLIAM ELACKWOOD AND BONS, EDINBURGH. KEMAHQUES SUR LA PRONONCIATION DE QUELQUES MOTS. ALGER. Girard, Demaudre, Levizac, et Lemare disent que le r du mot Alger doit se faire entendre. Ces autorite's sont imposantes ; cependant ce mot, devenu aujourd'hui un nom tout frangais, a perdu la trace de son origine etrangere, et re sonne plus autrement que le mot berger; c'est la prononcia- tion partout adoptee. Dans Baptiste, bapteme, baptiser, baptismal, baptistaire, le p ne se prononce point. CAEN (ville de Nor man die). On prononce Kan. On prononce a la francaise: architecte, patriarche, Michel, Achille, Machiavel, Ezechias, Ezechiel, Colcliide ; et, avec le son du k, Michel-Ange, Zacharie, Jericho. Almanack, chaos, se pro- nonceut Almana, lead. D final sonne dans David, Joad, Sud; mais il ne se prononce pas dans les mots nid, Madrid. DAVOUST (mare'chal). On prouonce Davou. DOUBS (riviere et departement). On prononce Don. G final a le son du k, dans bourg. Mais il est muet dans fau- bourg, Strasbourg, Edimbourg, Hambourg, Pctersbourg. GERANIUM, substantif masculin. Prononcez geraniome. GUIZOT. On pronouce Ghizd. Dans de Guise, I'u se fait en- tendre. Jouo (yoke"). On fait sentir un peu la lettre finale, merue devant une consonne. LA FAYETTE, La Haye. On prononce Lafa-iett, La He. !METZ, Munich, Zurich. On prononce Mess, Munik, Zurik. N final sonne dans Eden, hymen, le Tarn. Beam se prononce Bear. S se fait entendre dans atlas, mceurs, Calvados, Cresus, Jonas, Menelas, Pallas, Rubens, Themis, Tunis. Mais la lettre s est muette dans avis, trepas, Jesus, Jesus-Christ, Thomas, Judas. Dans le cas de la liaison, s final prend le son du z, avi-z-au lecteur. SASNE, subst. fern, (riviere). On prononce S6ne. SIEYES (1'abbe). On prononce Si-ess. SOLENNEL, ELLE, adjectif. On prononce toujours Solanel, et on fait 1'a bref ; il en est de meme dans les derives. SOULT (mare'chal). On prononce Soulte. SOURCIL (eye-brow). Prononcez sourci. SULLY. Ce mot ne doit pas prendre le son mouille, malgre' 1'opinion coutraire de quelques Grammairiens. BOOKS FOR NURSERY TUITION. CMckseed without Chickweed : being very Easy and Entertaining Lessons for little Children. In three parts. Part I. in words of three letters. Part II. in words of four letters. Part III. in words of five or more letters. New Edition, with beautiful Frontispiece by Anelay. 12ino, Is. cloth. Cobwebs to Catch Flies ; or, Dialogues in short Sentences. Adapted for Children from the age of three to eight years. In two Parts. Part I. Easy Lessons, suited to Children from three to five years of age. Part II. Short Stories for Children from five to eight years of age. 12iuo, 2s. cloth gilt. *** Each Part sold separately, price Is. The First or Mother's Dictionary. By Mrs JAMESON (formerly Mrs MURPHY). Tenth Edition. ISmo, 2s. 6d. cloth. *** Common expletives, the names of familiar objects, technical terms and words, the knowledge of which would be useless to children, or which could not well be explained in a manner adapted to the infant capacity, have been entirely omitted. Most of the definitions are short enough to be committed to memory. Peter Parley's Book of Poetry. With numerous Engravings. New Edition, revised, with Additions, 16mo, Is. 6d. cloth. *** This little volume consists in part of extracts from various publications, and in part of original articles written for it. It is designed to embrace a variety of pieces, some grave, and some gay; some calculated to amuse, and some to instruct. School-room Lyrics. Compiled and Edited by ANNE KNIGHT. New Edition. ISmo, Is. cloth. La Bagatelle ; intended to introduce Children of five or six years old to some knowledge of the French Language. Revised by Madame N. L. New Edition. 18mo, 2s. Gd. bound. " A well-known little book, revised, improved, and adorned with some very pretty new pictures. It is, indeed, French made very easy for very little children." THE SCHOOL AND THE TEACHER. The Little Scholar's Tirst Step in the German LANGUAGE. P>y Mrs FALOK LEPAIIN, forming an introduction to Dr falck Lebahn's " First German Course," &c. ISmo, cloth limp, price Is. " The First Step in the German Language" is designed for young beginners; consequently especial care has been bestowed on the pronunciation ; the intro- ductory reading lessons consisting mostly of words nearly alike in German and English. The Little Scholar's First Step in -German Reading. Containing Fifty short Moral Tales from CHRISTOPH VON SCHMID ; with Grammatical Notes and a complete Vocabulary. By Mrs FALCK LEBAHN, forming an Introduction to Dr Falck Lebahn's Series of German Heading Books. 18mo, cloth limp, price Is. The adroit manner in which instruction and amusement are mingled with moral and religious precepts gives these tales a practical value they would not otherwise possess. This combined with the fascinating style and beauty of nar- rative, have obtained for their author a great and well-merited popularity. London : LOCK.WOOD AND Co., 7 Stationers' Hall Court. OTHER WORKS NEW AND IM May be procured of every ^ 000 093 644 3 CLEF DES THEMES HE LA KOUVELLE GRAMMAIKE IES fiHAMilAIRES FRANTAISESL 12mo, 3s. 6d. bound. NEW GUIDE TO MODERN FRENCH CONVERSATION ; On, THE STUDENT AND TOUKI.-T.- riM.M'H VADl'-MKCUM : 'nhiLr a Coii', <;!ury. and Phrases and Dialogues on :''il or interesting Topic ; t< Aether with Model- Notes, and Car! '.nti.-h UIM! Krcneli .UK! Measures; the whole exhibiting, in a distinct manner, the true Pronunciation <>t ; ! .anguagc. Eighteenth Edition. 18mo, price 2s. 6d. strongly halt-bound. ' V "1 / vonc ilible jionr tipprcndre la lanpiie ':ble manuel dc tout .. IAL.- BEAIITiS DES ECRIVAINS FRANCAIS, ANCIENS ET MODEBNES. Onvnge Classiqne i To Institutions. Douzibme Edition, au^mcntce, d . 'iiiloso- )>lii . Grammaticalef, ct Biograjihiques. 12mo, d. bound. " An ! taining a selection of pieces in both prose fin'' whirli, whik- it liirnisln s a convenient reading book for the M ' time uffcirdArAJdgHiBg ^A intei^jng yi^w of 1 literati.. )X A LATANGUE FRANgAISE; OU, FABLES ET CONTES CHOISIS, I'aits Memorables^etc. Avec un Dictionn.iiro \ qui commencent i apprenttre la I'anguc iranvaise. Edition, 12ino, 2s. 6d. bound. U'St French reading bflok, whctk^r for tchooli or du TAIT'S MAGAZINE. LE TREMOR NATIONAL; " OB, GUIDE TO THE TRANSLATION or KNGI.ISH INTO FRENCH AT SIGHT. Third Edition, 12mo, 2s. 6d. bound. (ST "I.e TV-sor National'' rnnbists of Mif.matiral ami (-..nversatlonal j.! . ch, a facility in eiiirtssing thi-rnselves in tha: * Jf * ty KEY to the above. l'Jmf>, 2s. cloth. ion: LOCK WOOD 'AND Co., 7 Stationers' Hall Court. Edinburgh: OUVEB AXD BVyt>. Dul)Vrn": M'GLASUAK ASD GILL.